Signs & Events Preceding the Mahdi
Warning: Many of the narrations on this page could be weak.
Abu Saeed al-Khudri has reported that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: ''He (Mahdi) will be sent at a time of intense disputes and differences among people and disasters.'' (Ahmad)
1) A Sound (Blast) in Ramadan
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ( ﻙ ) ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻲ ( 519 ) ﻋﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻮﺷﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ :
)) ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ , ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ [ ﻣﻬﻤﻬﺔ ] , ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ , ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻪ [ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺐ ] ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ ﻳﻜﺜﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﻠﻰ , ﻭﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺎﺀ , ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﺩﻣﺎﺅﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺮﺓ , ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻬﺮﺏ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﻬﻢ , ﻓﻴﺆﺗﻰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ , ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻳﻊ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﻩ , ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ : ﺇﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻘﻚ , ﻳﺮﺿﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ
Shahr ibn Hawshab said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ stated: “There will be a Sound in (the Hijri Islamic month of ) Ramadan, a
Mahmaha (murmuring) in (the Hijri Islamic month of) Shawwal , and war among tribes (peoples) in (the Hijri Islamic month of) Zul-Qi’dah and its sign will be that
pilgrims will be robbed (looted). There will be a war with many people killed and blood will be shed in Mina (near Mecca), such that their blood flows on the Jamra (Stone of Satan at which pilgrims throw stones).” (Abu Amru Uthman bin Saeed Ad-Dani's
Kitab Al-Sunan Al-Waredah fi al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺣﺴﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻬﻤﺪﺍﻧﻲ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺴﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻳﻘﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺎ ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺮﺟﺎ ﻫﺮﺟﺎ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﻗﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺗﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻭﺭﻫﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻻﺯﻝ ( ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺩ ) ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺻﻠﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﺎﺩﺧﻠﻮﺍ ﺑﻴﻮﺗﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻘﻮﺍ
ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺑﻜﻢ ﻭﺳﺪﻭﺍ ﻛﻮﺍﻛﻢ ﻭﺩﺛﺮﻭﺍ ﺃﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻭﺳﺪﻭﺍ ﺁﺫﺍﻧﻜﻢ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﺨﺮﻭﺍ ﻟﻠﻪ ﺳﺠﺪﺍ ﻭﻗﻮﻟﻮﺍ ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﺭﺑﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺠﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻠﻚ
Abdullah ibn Mas'ud [r.a.] said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said:
"When there is a Sayha (scream) in
Ramadan, then there will be turmoil in Shawwal , and the tribes will form groups in Zul-Qi'da, and blood will be spilled in Zul-Hijja, and in Al-Muharram! What is prohibited?" saying it three times, "Oh, Oh! The people will be killed in a great massacres." He said: "We said: "What is the Sayha (scream) , O Messenger of Allah?" He said: "This will be in the middle of Ramadan, on a Friday morning. That will be when the month of Ramadan begins on a Friday night. There will be a Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) that will awaken one who is asleep, and bring the young women out of their rooms, on a Friday night during a year of many earthquakes (and very cold) . So when Ramadan begins on a Friday night in that year, then when you have prayed Fajr on Friday in the middle of Ramadan, then enter your houses, close your doors, block your windows, cover yourselves, and block your ears. When you sense the scream, fall down in prostration to Allah and say: "Subhanal-Quddus, subhanal-Quddus, rabbunal-Quddus (Glory be to the Most Holy, glory be to the Most Holy, our Lord is the Most Holy)." For whoever does that will survive, and whoever does not will perish."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan, Hadith )
ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻠﻤﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﻟﻮﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻪ ﺃﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺑﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻳﺼﻌﻖ ﻟﻪ ﺳﺒﻌﻮﻥ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ ﻭﻳﺼﻢ ﺳﺒﻌﻮﻥ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﻮﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺘﻚ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺑﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺫ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺠﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺒﺮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﻄﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﻳﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻪ ﺑﻼﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺘﻲ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺝ ﻷﻣﺘﻲ . ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﺘﺒﻬﺎ ﻳﻨﺠﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺳﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻐﻞ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻟﻒ
Fairouz Al-Dailami said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ
said: " In, Ramadan, there will be a
Sound (or voice) . They said: O Messenger of Allah, is it in its beginning, in its middle, or in its end ? He said: No, in the middle of Ramadan. If the night of the middle is Friday, there will be a sound from the sky that causes death to 70 thousand and causes deafness to 70 thousand. They asked: 'O Messenger of Allah, who will survive from your Umma (nation)? ' He said: 'Whoever stays at home, seeks refuge (to Allah) through Sujud (prostration), and openly declares Takbir of Allah ('Allah Akbar'). Then, another sound will follow it. The first sound is the voice of (angel) Gabriel and the second sound is the voice of Satan. The sound is in Ramadan, the disturbance is in Shawwal, the tribes (or nations) form into warring groups in Zul-Qi'da, and it is feared for the pilgrim in Zul-Hijja. In Al-Muharram, what is prohibited in Muharram? Its beginning is calamity on my Umma (nation) and its end is a relief to my Umma. A Rahila (an animal or mode of transportation) that may save him is better than a fortress (castle) that shelters one thousand. " (Tabarani, Abu Amru Ad-Dani, Al-Haithami's Mujama Al-Zawa'id)
ﺃﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻈﺮﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺃﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻰ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺰﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﻋﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ : ﺇﻥ ﻧَّﺸَﺄْ ﻧُﻨَﺰِّﻝْ ﻋَﻠَﻴْﻬِﻢ ﻣِّﻦ ﺍﻟﺴَّﻤَﺎﺀ ﺁﻳَﺔً ﻓَﻈَﻠَّﺖْ ﺃَﻋْﻨَﺎﻗُﻬُﻢْ ﻟَﻬَﺎ ﺧَﺎﺿِﻌِﻴﻦَ . ﺁﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﻔﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﻈﺎﻥ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: " Wait for the end of misery once three things occur." We said: What are they, O' Prince of Believers? He said: "The dispute among the people of AshSham (Greater Syria), the Black Banners (battalions carrying black banners), and the Qaz'a in the month of Ramadan. It was asked: "What is the Qaz'a ? He said: "Haven't you heard what Allah said in the Quran (26:4): ﺇﻥ ﻧَّﺸَﺄْ ﻧُﻨَﺰِّﻝْ ﻋَﻠَﻴْﻬِﻢ ﻣِّﻦ ﺍﻟﺴَّﻤَﺎﺀ ﺁﻳَﺔً ﻓَﻈَﻠَّﺖْ ﺃَﻋْﻨَﺎﻗُﻬُﻢْ ﻟَﻬَﺎ ﺧَﺎﺿِﻌِﻴﻦ َ 'If We wish, We can send down to them from
Heaven a sign, such that their necks remain surrendered to it (mesmerized in amazement).' This Aya (sign) that makes a girl come out of her bedroom, wakes up the person who is asleep, and frightens the one who is awake." (Ibn Al-Shajari's Al-Amali Al-Shajaria)
ﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻖ
ﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﺎ
ﻳﻠﻴﻬﻢ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: "During the time of the second Sufyani who is physically deformed, a Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) will occur in AshSham (Greater Syria) such that each people will think it is the devastation of other people next to them." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan)
2) The Battle in Mina
Before the Mahdi emerges, an inter-tribal fight will take place. In the same year, Muslim Pilgrims will be looted and a battle will erupt in Mina (near Mecca) in which many people will be killed.
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ( ﻙ ) ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ( 987 ) ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﻗﺎﻝ :
ﻳﺤﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺎ , ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ , ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺇﻣﺎﻡ , ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ , ﺇﺫ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﻜﻠﺐ , ﻓﺜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ , ﻓﺎﻗﺘﺘﻠﻮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺔ ﺩﻣﺎ , ﻓﻴﻔﺰﻋﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺮﻫﻢ , ﻓﻴﺄﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻌﺒﺔ ﻳﺒﻜﻲ , ﻛﺄﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ [ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ] ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻣﻮﻋﻪ , ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ : ﻫﻠﻢ ( ﺇﻟﻴﻨﺎ ) ﻓﻠﻨﺒﺎﻳﻌﻚ , ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻝ : ﻭﻳﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻬﺪ ﻧﻘﻀﺘﻤﻮﻩ؟ , ﻭﻛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻡ [ ﻗﺪ ] ﺳﻔﻜﺘﻤﻮﻩ ؟ , ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﺮﻫﺎ , ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﺩﺭﻛﺘﻤﻮﻩ ﻓﺒﺎﻳﻌﻮﻩ , ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ , ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ( ﻙ ) ﻧﻌﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﺩ ( 986 ) , ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻛﻢ ( 8584\503\4 ) ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺑﻦ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ :
ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺗَﺠَﺎُﺩُﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ , ﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺌﺬ ﻳﻨﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ , [ ﻓﻴﻜﺜﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﻠﻰ , ﻭﺗﺴﻔﻚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺎﺀ , ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﺩﻣﺎﺅﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺮﺓ ] , ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻬﺮﺏ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﺆﺗﻰ ﺑﻪ , ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ , ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻳﻊ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﻩ , [ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ : ﺇﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻘﻚ ] , ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻳﻌﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﺪﺭ , ﻳﺮﺿﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ
Amr bin Shuaib reported from his grandfather that the Messenger of Allah (Prophet Mohammad) ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said, ' 'In Zul-Qa'da
(Islamic month), there will be fight among the tribes, Muslim pilgrims will be looted and there will be a battle in Mina in which many people will be slain and blood will flow until it runs over the Jamarat Al-Aqba (one of the three stone pillars at Mina). The man they seek will flee and will be found between the Rukn (a corner of the Ka'ba containing the Black Stone) and the Maqam of Prophet Abraham (near Ka'ba). He will be forced to accept people's Bay'a (being chosen as a Leader/Caliph). The number of those offering Bay'a will be the same as the number of the people of Badr (Muslim fighters who participated in the Battle of Badr at time of Prophet Mohammad). Then, the dweller of Heaven and the dweller of the Earth will be pleased with him. ' (Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
Abu Huraira [r.a] said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "There will be a Hadda (a blast or a powerful, hammering sound) in
Ramadan that will awaken one who is asleep, and terrify one who is awake. Then, there will appear a group ['isaba] in Shawwal , then bloodshed in (the month of) Zul-Hijjah . Then the prohibitions will be violated in (the month of) Al-Muharram . Then, there will be death in (the month of) Safar. Then the tribes will quarrel with each other in
(the month of) Rabi' , then the most amazing thing will happen between
(the months of) Jumada and Rajab. Then, a well-fed she-camel will be better than a castle sheltering a thousand." (Al-Haakim)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺳﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻚ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺑﻦ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﺟﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻋﺎﻣﺌﺬ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ ﻳﻜﺜﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺎﺀ ﻭﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺮ
Amro bin Shu'aib mentioned that
the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: : "There will be rebellion in (the month of) Shawwal , talk of war in (the month of) Zul-Qa'da and war itself in (the month of) Zul-Hijja . Pilgrims will be robbed, and blood will flow over the Jamrat Al-Aqaba (one of the three stone pillars at Mina). (Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book
Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
3) The Euphrates River will uncover a Mountain of Gold
(something very valuable)
The Final Hour will not come until the Euphrates river (which originates in Taurus Mountains in Turkey, flows through Syria and Iraq and ends in the Arabian/ Persian Gulf) will uncover a treasure (something very valuable) over which people will fight and die. It should be noted that this is a sign, which will precede the Mahdi only according to some Muslim scholars. Abu Huraira reported that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said, ''The Hour shall not occur until the Euphrates will uncover a mountain of gold over which people will fight . Ninety-nine out of one hundred shall be killed and each one of them will say 'Perhaps, I shall be the one to succeed'.'' (Sahih Muslim). Another narration says that whoever is present at the time when the Euphrates uncovers a mountain of gold should not take the gold.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﻴﻊ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻭﺫﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻚ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻝﻟﻪ
Ka'b said: "There will be around the Euphrates , near AshSham ( Syria or Damascus) or a little after it, a great assembly (of armies). They will fight each other over wealth, and seven out of every nine will be killed. And that will be after the Al-Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) and the Al-Wahiya (catastrophe) in the month of Ramadan, and after the split resulting in three banners (battalions or armies), each (head of a battalion or army) will seek the kingship (reign) for himself, among them is a man whose name is 'Abdullah." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﺟﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺟﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻴﻤﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻫﺮﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺠﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺠﻠﻲ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺣﺴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻫﺐ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
Abu Huraira said: "The fourth Fitna (strife) remains for 12 years , then it clears . Once it clears, the
Euphrates will recede revealing a mountain of gold. Seven out of every nine (people fighting for it) will be killed." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
4) Eclipses
- Muhammad ibn Ali ibn Al-Hanafiyyah said: “For our Mahdi, there will be two signs that have never occurred since the creation of the heavens and the Earth: The moon will be eclipsed (lunar eclipse) on the first night of Ramadan, and the sun will be eclipsed (solar eclipse) in its middle (of Ramadan).” (Imam al Akbar Ali bin Umar Al-Daraqutni's
Sunan Al-Daraqutni )
- “ There are two signs for the Mahdi… The first one is the lunar eclipse on the first night of Ramadan, and the second is the solar eclipse in the middle of this month.” (Ibn Hajar al-Haithami's book Al-Qawl al-Mukhtasar fi `Alamat al-Mahdi al-Muntazar, p. 47)
- “ Lunar eclipse will occur in the first night of the Ramadan. In the middle of the Ramadan, solar eclipse will occur.” (Muhammad Al-Barzanji, Al-Isha’ah li Ashrat AsSa'ah, p. 199 )
- “ During his reign, on the 14th of the Ramadan, solar eclipse will occur. On the 1st of that month, moon will darken…” (Imam Rabbani, Letters of Rabbani, 380; Letters of Rabbani , 2-1163)
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻧﻌﻴﻢ ( 642 ) ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ :
)) ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ((
- “There will be two solar eclipses in Ramadan before the Mahdi’s advent.” (Imam Qurtubi's book
Mukhtasar Tazkirah , p. 440 )
- “When you see it, then store up one year’s supply of food.” (Nuaim ibn Hammad’s book Kitab al-Fitan)
5) The Sun makes a Sign (or rises as a sign)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﻭﺍﺑﻦ ﺛﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﺍﻕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻃﺎﻭﻭﺱ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻄﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺁﻳﺔ
Ali bin Abdullah bin Abbas said:
"The Mahdi will not emerge until the Sun rises as a sign (or unless a sign emerges from the Sun)." (Al-Baihaqi, Al-Haakim, Al-Harbi, AsSuyuti, Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan , Ibn Hajar al-Haithami's book Al-Qawl al-Mukhtasar fi `Alamat al-Mahdi al-Muntazar, p. 47, Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi's book Al-Burhan fi Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir al-Zaman, p. 33 ) Another variation says a sign appears with the sun.
6) A Star with a tail appears from the East
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺮﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺟﻌﻔﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﻃﻠﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻃﻠﻊ ﺑﻬﻼﻙ ﻗﻮﻡ ﻧﻮﺡ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻏﺮﻗﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻭﻃﻠﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻫﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻭﺣﻴﻦ ﻗﺘﻞ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺯﻛﺮﻳﺎ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻌﻴﺬﻭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻦ
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻠﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻻ ﻳﻠﺒﺜﻮﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﺑﻤﺼﺮ
Abi Ja'far said: "If the Abbas reaches Khorasan, (a star known as) Horn Zu-Shifa rises in the East. The first time it appeared was at the perishing of the people of (Prophet) Noah when Allah drowned them. And it rose at the time of (Prophet) Abraham, peace be upon him, when they cast him into fire, and when Allah caused Pharaoh (at the time of Moses) and those with him to perish, and when (Prophet) John (the Baptist) son of Zakariah was killed. If you see this, seek refuge in Allah against the evilness of Fitan (strifes and tribulations). It will rise after the eclipse of the sun and the moon. Then, soon the Abqa (a man seeking to rule) in Egypt will appear."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan, Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi's book
Al-Burhan fi `Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir az-Zaman, p. 32)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﺪﺃ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻟﻪ ﺫﻧﺎﺏ
Ibn Mas'ud said: "There will be a sign in (the month of) Safar and the star with a tail will begin ." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book
Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ
ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻵﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻧﺠﻢ ﺍﻵﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﻨﻘﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺑﻴﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺟﺐ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﻗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ
Al-Walid said: "The redness and stars we have seen are not the Ayat (signs). The star of the Ayat (signs) is a star that flips (or turns) in the horizons in (the month of ) Safar or in (the 2 months of) Rabi (the first and second Rabi), or in (the month of) Rajab. Once this happens, Khankan marshes the Turks (Russians); the Romans (Europeans) of Zawahir will follow with the banners (battalions) and Crosses." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺎﻝ ﻛﻌﺐ
ﻫﻮ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻷﻫﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻛﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺭ
Ka'b said: "It is a star that rises from the East and illuminates for the people of the Earth like the illumination of a moon in a full-moon night." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book
Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺫﻧﺎﺏ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ
Ka'b said: “ 'A star will rise from the East before the appearance of the Mahdi and it has a tail.' And Sharik said: ' Before the appearance of the Mahdi, the sun will have an eclipse in the month of Ramadan twice.' ” (Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
"A star with a tail that illuminates all places will originate from the East, at
three or seven-day intervals."
(Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book Al-Isha'ah li Ashrat AsSaa'h )
7) Column of Fire or Light from the East
A huge fire from the East for 3 or 7 nights, darkness will be seen in the sky, and there will be a redness in the sky spread across the horizon, unlike the pink in the horizon with which we are familiar. (Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
ﺃﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮﻱ : ﺟ 2 ﺻ 27 ﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﺑﻦ ﻗﺎﺫﻭﻳﻪ ﻗﺎﻻ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﺃﺣﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺇﺳﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ، ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﺮﻳﺔ ، ﻋﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻗﺎﺫﻭﻳﻪ : ﺁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺷﺒﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺄﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ . ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﻻﻫﻠﻚ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺔ . ﻗﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﺭ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ
Ibn Qazuwaih said that Kathir bin Murra said: " The Aya (sign) of the event of Ramadan will be a fire in the sky like the necks of camels or like iron columns. If you see it, prepare for your family food supplies for a year." Or perhaps he (Kathir bin Murra) said: "The Aya of the event is a column of fire originating from the sky." (Ibn Al-Shajari's Al-Amali Al-Shajaria)
ﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻗﺎﺫﻭﻳﻪ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺷﺒﻴﺐ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﻞ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻧﺼﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ، ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﻳﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ
Ibn Qazuwaih said that Kathir bin Murra said: " The beginning of the Aya (sign) will be redness in the sky." (Ibn Al-Shajari's Al-Amali Al-Shajaria)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻤﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ
ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ
Kathir bin Murra said: " The Aya (sign) of the occurrence is in Ramadan, and commotion (disturbance) is in Shawwal, Nazail in Zul-Qa'da, fighting is in Zul-Hijja, and the Aya (sign) of this is an illuminating column of light in the sky." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﺄﻋﺪﻭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺟﻮﻉ
Khaded Bin Madan said: " If you see a column of fire from the East, in the month of Ramadan, in the sky, get food as much as you can, for it is (going to be) a year of starvation (famine)." (Tabarani, Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﻳﻮﻧﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺛﻮﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ
ﻋﻦ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﺁﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺭ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻳﺮﺍﻩ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻛﻠﻬﻢ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺃﺩﺭﻙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻠﻴﻌﺪ ﻷﻫﻠﻪ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺔ
Khaded Bin Madan said: " An Aya (sign) which is a column of fire rising from the East will appear that all people of the World will be able see. Whoever is present (alive) should arrange for his family food supply for one year." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
8) A Call and a Hand from Heaven
"A call in Ramadan that will be heard by each people in their own language, announcing the Mahdi's advent will awaken those who are asleep and alarm those that are awake."
(Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﻉ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ
ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻛﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﺃﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻣﻴﺮﻛﻢ ﻓﻼﻥ
Saeed bin Al-Musayab said: "There will be disunity and dispute until a hand from Heaven and a caller calls that your prince is this person." (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻭﻫﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻫﺸﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﻢ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻢ ﺑﻔﻼﻥ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﻊ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺸﻴﺮ
Saeed bin Al-Musayab said: "There will be a Fitna in AshSham. Its beginning will be like a play of boys. Then, the affairs of people will not settle on anything and unity will not be achieved until a caller calls from Heaven: 'Follow this person', and a hand appears as a sign." (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﺧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺘﺎﻝ ﻳﻮﻣﺌﺬ ﻳﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻻ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﻭﻗﺎﻟﺖ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﺖ ﻋﻤﻴﺲ : ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻔﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺪﻻﺓ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ
Al-Zuhri said: " When the Sufyani and the Mahdi meet to fight each other, a voice from Heaven will be heard saying: 'The people who are loyal to Allah are friends of this person, meaning Al-Mahdi.' Al-Zuhri said that Asma bint Omais said: 'The sign of this will be a hand dangling (extended) from Heaven that people will see'." ( Jalal-uddine AsSuyuti's
Al-Urf Al-Wardi fi Akhbar Al-Mahdi , a part of Al-Hawi li Al-Fatawa )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﻋﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺎﺯﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻻ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻴﺮﻛﻢ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻻ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻛﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻗﺘﺎﻻ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻓﺠﻞ ﺳﻼﺣﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺫﻉ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺟﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺫﻉ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﻔﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻳﺸﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﺇﻻ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﺪﺭ ﻓﻴﺬﻫﺒﻮﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺎﻳﻌﻮﻥ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﻬﻢ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: "When people are in Mina and Arafat (near Mecca, for Hajj), after tribes split into parties, a caller will say "Your prince is this person". Another voice follows it saying: "He is lying". Then, another voice says: "It (first caller) said the truth." So, they will engage in fierce fight .... then you will see a hand dangling from Heaven. Then, the fight becomes even more fierce such that only the number of (Muslim) people who fought in Badr remains alive. So, they go to give Bay'a (allegiance) to the man (Mahdi)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺴﻒ ﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻟﺪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﻄﺎﻥ
Ali bin Abi Taleb said: " After the
Khusf (land collapse), a caller from Heaven calls: 'The truth is in the family of Mohammad ' in the beginning of the morning. Then, another caller at the end of the morning calls: 'The truth is in the progeny of Jesus.' This (second call) is from Satan." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan ) A variation of this narration is attributed to Abi Ja'far mentions that the second caller says that the truth is in the family of Jesus or Al-Abass and this second call from Satan from the bottom of the Earth.
Huzaifa said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said : "At that point, a call will come from Heaven saying: ' O' people, surely Allah forbids tyrants and their followers for you and (Allah) bestows leadership upon the best of the nation of Muhammad. Join him in Mecca -- he is the Mahdi !' " (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan , Tabarani, and Abu Amru Uthman bin Saeed Ad-Dani's Kitab Al-Sunan Al-Waredah fi Al-Fitan)
9) Clashes between Bani Hashem and Bani Umaya
Bani Hashem is the family clan to which Prophet Mohammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ belongs. It may also have been mentioned in the Hadith to signify the Shia, in general.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺃﻣﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﻴﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺃﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﺀ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ
Abi Qabil said: "A man will reign from Bani Hashem (meaning from the family of Prophet Mohammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ). He kills Bani Umaya until very few of them remain alive and does not kill except them. Then, a man from Bani Umaya rise up and kills for every man two until no body remains alive, except women. Then, the Mahdi appears." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺜﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﻋﻤﻦ ﺣﺪﺛﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺱ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺒﻠﻐﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻮﺕ
Al-Haytham bin Abd-Al-Rahman narrated based someone that Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.), who is the cousin, son-in-law, and the 4th successor (Caliph) of Prophet Mohammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: " A man will come out from the East before the Mahdi, from his Household (family), carrying a sword for 8 months, killing and maiming people. He heads toward Jerusalem and dies once he reaches (conquers) it." (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
Abdullah ibn Umar said: While we were sitting with the Messenger of Allah (Prophet Mohammad) , he mentioned the Fitan (strifes, trials & tribulations ), mentioning many of them until he mentioned the Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) of Ahlaas. Someone asked him: ' O Messenger of Allah, what is the "Ahlaas" Fitna? He said ' It is fleeing and plunder. Then, will come Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) of AsSarra': its smoke is under the feet of a man (descendant) from my household (family) , who claims he is of me ( my follower), but he is not because my Awlyia (followers or loyalists) are those who fear God.
Then, the people will choose a man (to be a leader) who will be like a hip-bone on a rib (meaning he will not be able to hold a firm leadership grip ). Then, the
Duhaima (Dark & Cunning that catches people off guard) Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) that will not leave anyone without slapping him a slap (testing his faith); if people say it is finished, it stays longer; a man who is in the morning a Mu'min (Believer) by the the evening becomes a Kafir (Disbeliever), until people will be divided into two factions: a faction of Iman (faithfulness in belief) without hypocrisy and a faction of hypocrisy without Iman (faithfulness in belief). When this happens, expect the (Fitna of) Dajjal that day or the next day'." ( Sunan Abu Dawud, Al-Haakim, and Al-Zahabi)
10) The Killing of the Good Soul
from Bani Hashem (& his brother or sister)
The good soul who will be killed is believed to be a man from Bani Hashem, meaning from the family clan of Prophet Mohammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ .
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺯﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﺯﺭﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺎﺳﺮ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﻮﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺔ
ﻧﺎﺩﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻴﺮﻛﻢ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺣﻘﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻝﺍ
Amar bin Yasir said: "Once the good soul and his brother are killed, will be killed in Mecca, a caller from Heaven calls: Your prince is (says his name). This is the Mahdi who will fill Earth with equity and justice. "
(Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﻭﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺎﺵ ﻭﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺟﻌﻔﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ
ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻭﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﺃﺧﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻳﺶ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺼﻠﺒﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﺪ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﻪ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻭﻓﺎﻃﻤﺔ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said about what the Sufyani does in Mecca: "He (the Sufyani) kills two siblings from Bani Hashem of Quraish, a man and his sister, they are called Mohammad and Fatima. He crucifies them at the gate of the Masjid (in Mecca)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
11) The Emergence of the Sufyani and the Khusf (Land Collapse) in Bayda (near Mecca)
There are several WEAK narrations that seem to indicate that tyrant Muslim leader will emerge before the Mahdi in Syria and rule the Middle East. Some of these narrations refer to this tyrant leader as the Sufyani , meaning a descendant of Abu Sufyan. Some weak narration specify that the Sufyani's name will be Urwa bin Muhammad and his Kuniya (nick name) will be Abu-Utba. Some narrations even refer to two Sufyanis, not just one.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻮﺍﺩﻫﺎ
Abi Sadek said: " The Mahdi does not emerge until the Sufyani emerges on the ashes (of the Muslim nation)."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻴﺦ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ
Al-Zuhri said: "During the reign of the
second Sufyani, a sign in the sky will be seen." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻭﻫﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻓﺮﻱ ﺳﻤﻊ ﺃﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﺱ
ﺳﻤﻊ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺹ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺧﺴﻒ ﺑﺠﻴﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺪﺍﺀ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ
Abdullah bin Amr Ibn Al-Aas said:
"If a Khusf (land collapse) occurs to an army in Bayda (near Mecca), that will be the sign of the appearance of the Mahdi." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan) This sign indicates that person the army was sent to attack is the Mahdi.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺣﺒﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻴﻦ
Yazid bin Habib said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: " The coming out of the Sufyani is after thirty nine ." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻜﺮﻣﺔ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺒﻊ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻜﻪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻬﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻜﻪ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ
Ibn Abbas (r.a.) said: " If the coming out of the Sufyani is in thirty seven , his reign will be for 28 months. If he come out in thirty nine , his reign will be for 9 months." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ
Sulaiman bin Isa said: "I was told that the Sufyani will rule for three and a half years. " (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﻦ ﺣﺴﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺙ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ
ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﻤﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺩﺓ
Al-Harith bin Abdullah said: " A man from the progeny of Abi Sufyan comes out, from the drought valley, with (an army carrying) red banners. He has thin arms and thin legs, with long neck, very yellowish (meaning pale) in complexion, on him (can be seen) the mark or sign of worship." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan ) This narration most probably refers to the first Sufyani .
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﻴﻊ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮﺃﺓ ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺮ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ
Ka'b said: "He (Sufyani) will rule for the pregnancy period of a woman (meaning 9 months). His (Sufyani's) name is Abdullah bin Yazid and he is the Al-Azhar ibn Al-Kulaiba or Al-Zahri bin Al-Kulaiba, the physically deformed Sufyani." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﺘﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺮﺣﺔ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﻣﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﺷﺠﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﺎﺯ
ﻣﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﻣﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺣﻤﺶ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺪﻳﻦ
ﻏﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﺓ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: " After Al-Azhar ibn Al-Kulaiba enters Kufa (in Iraq), he will suffer from Qarha (illness), so he leaves it, then dies on his way. Then, another man from them (Bani Al-Kulaiba or Sufyan) emerges (and succeeds him) from between Al-Taif and Mecca or between Mecca and Medina ... in Hijaz. He is physically deformed, has a flat face, strong arms, his eyes are inwardly set deep in his eye sockets. At his time, the Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) will occur." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﻬﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺧﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﻢ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: "At the time of the second Sufyani, the Hadda
(powerful, hammering sound) occurs, such that every nation thinks the land or nation next to them was devastated." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﺡ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻯ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ
ﺑﺈﻳﻠﻴﺎ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻋﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ
Ibn Masud said: "A star (possibly Al-Tariq Star) begins. Then, a man who is Awar (has a deformed eye)
moves/roams around Eelya (Jerusalem or British Isles) . Then, the Khusf (land collapse) occurs. " (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﺡ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺈﻳﻠﻴﺎﺀ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻋﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻜﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﺝ ﻭﻳﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﻌﺚ ﺑﺠﻴﺶ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ
Ibn Masud said: " A man who is Awar (has a deformed eye) moves/roams around Eelya (Jerusalem or or British Isles). Killing increases. He makes ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎ (plundering and taking slaves) permissible. He is the one who sends the army to (attack) Medina."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻘﺎﺗﻞ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻓﻴﻬﺰﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻠﺴﻄﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻮﺍ ﻣﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺄﺗﻮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺺ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﻠﻐﻮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺑﺔ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺮﻗﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻗﺮ ﻗﻮﻓﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻓﻴﺤﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺮﺣﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﻏﺪﻭﺓ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺸﻲ ﺑﺠﻴﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﺈﺍﺫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺄﻓﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﻲ ﻭﺛﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ
ﻓﺒﺎﻳﻌﻮﺍ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻴﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﺫﻫﺒﺖ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﺜﻮﺭﻭﻥ ﻭﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﺧﻠﻮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺗﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﺀ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺟﻴﺸﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺎﺯ
Al-Zuhri said: "The people of AshSham offer Bay'a (allegiance) to the Sufyani. He defeats the people of the East (probably the black banners), kicking them out of Palestine. ...and follows them and defeats them in several more locations, including Qirqisia. He will suffer from Qarha in his throat and after entering Kufa, he leaves it and dies once he reaches the outskirts of AsSham. The people of AshSham will offer Bay'a to the son of Al-Kulaiba whose name is Abdullah bin Yazid bin Al-Kulaiba. His eyes are inwardly set deep in his eye sockets and his face is deformed. Once the people of the East know about the death of Sufyani, they say the reign of people of AshSham is finished. So, they rise up. Once Ibn Kulaiba (the second Sufyani) learns about this rise up, he sends an army. They fight and the defeat will be for the people of the East. Ibn Kulaiba's army will enter Kufa and kill the fighters (of people of the East) and takes their children and women, and destroys Kufa. Then, he will send an army to Hijaz (Mecca & Medina)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
Khalid bin Maadan said " The
Sufyani will defeat those who joined forces against him on two occasions, then he will die." (Nuaim bin Hammad’s Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺎﺵ ﻋﻤﻦ ﺣﺪﺛﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺟﻌﻔﺮ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺿﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻬﻪ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺩ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻟﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﻼ ﻻ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻳﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻧﻬﺰﻡ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺑﻜﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻣﺮﻳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺆﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻴﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻓﺎﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺠﺪ ﺃﺣﺪﺍ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺆﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻗﻢ ﻓﺎﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻴﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ ﻟﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﺤﻦ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻧﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻟﻴﻠﻘﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺗﻠﻪ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﻳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﻬﺰﻡ ﻭﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻳﻮﻣﺌﺬ ﻭﺍﻝ ﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻟﻰ ﺃﻡ ﺣﻜﻴﻢ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺸﺎﻡ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻭﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺄﺗﻴﻜﻢ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺭﺃﻳﺘﻪ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺒﺮ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﺑﺸﻲﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺯﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺯﺭﻳﺮ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺎﺳﺮ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻛﻠﻬﻢ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻚ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻜﻠﺐ ﻭﻳﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺑﺪﻣﺸﻖ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻦ ﺣﺪﺛﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﺑﻦ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺟﻼ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻦ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺔ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﺚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻐﺰﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻡ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻋﻈﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺰﻭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺄﺗﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺮﻩ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺑﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺳﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﻜﻬﻢ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻤﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻱ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻳﻜﺮﻩ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﻠﻐﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻭﻩ ﻗﺪ ﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺪﺍ ﻓﻴﺴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻘﺎﻩ ﻓﻴﻬﺰﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﻘﺘﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻷﻫﻞ ﻧﺼﺮﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻼﺩﻱ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﻭﻭﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﺭﺟﻌﻮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻼﺩﻛﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻨﻴﺖ ﻋﻨﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻌﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻼﺩﻫﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﺤﻦ ﻣﻠﻜﻨﺎﻩ ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺼﺮﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻗﺘﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻧﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻼﺩﻧﺎ ﺑﻼﺩﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻠﻤﻮﺍ ﺣﺘﻔﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﻠﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺮ ﻭﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻠﻮ ﻳﺸﺄ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺼﻴﻬﻢ ﺃﺣﺼﺎﻫﻢ ﻟﻘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻘﻲ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ
12) The emergence of Abqa' and As'hab
Each of these Muslim men will be seeking to rule the Muslims.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻱ ﻗﺮﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺮﻗﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺬ ﻭﺭﺟﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺟﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻴﻐﻀﺐ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺶ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﻔﺖ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﻌﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻤﻜﺔ
Zi Qarnat said: "People will differ in the month of Safar and split (in their allegiance) among four individuals: (1) a man who has sought refuge in Mecca, (2) two men in AshSham, one of them is the Sufyani and the other one in a son of Al-Hakam, who is blueish and As'hab (reddish white in complexion), (3) and a man from the people of Egypt who is a tyrant. These are the four. So, a man from Kinda (could be the U.S. or Britain) becomes angry. He marshes towards those vying for kingship in AshSham. His army comes to Egypt, kills the tyrant (Abqa') and destroys Egypt severely. Then, he sends an expedition to Mecca (to attack the Mahdi)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﻡ ﻭﺧﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻣﺸﻖ ﻭﺳﻘﻂ
ﻃﺎﺋﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﺪﻣﺸﻖ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻼﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻈﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﻗﺒﻠﺖ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺠﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﻡ ﺑﻘﺮﻗﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺳﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺤﻮﻣﻬﻢ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: "If the Turks (Russians) and Romans (Europeans) (in alliance) amass their armies and a village in Damascus experiences Khusf (land collapse), and a group of people fall off the western end of their mosque, then three banners will be raised in AshSham: Abqa', As'Hab (reddish, white man), and Sufyani. A man in Damascus will be besieged, then killed with those who are with him. Two men from Bani Sufyan will appear (probably As'Hab and Sufyani), the second one will be the victorious. Once the support armies of Abqa' approach, the Sufyani defeats them. He (Sufyani) will kill the Turks (Russians) and Romans (Europeans) in Qirqisia (an ancient city in Eastern Syria) until the foxes in the land satisfy their hunger from their flesh (of the Turks and Romans)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
13) Black Banners from the East
The following narrations state that an army from the East (most likely from Khorasan) carrying black banners will lay the foundation for the Mahdi's future dominion, six years before the Mahdi appears. The name "Khorasan" is said to be derived from Persian words that mean "land where the sun rises".
Khorasan (a region that includes Afghanistan, Taijikstan, Northwestern Pakistan, Northeastern Iran, etc.).
Thawban reported that the Prophet
ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said, "Three men will be killed at the place where your treasure is (most likely, this is the treasure prophesied to be uncovered by Euphrates River, but may alternatively be the oil/petrol in Arabia, or the treasure underneath the Ka'ba). Each of them will be the son of a Caliph , but none of them will get hold of the treasure. Then, the
Black Banners will come out of the East, and they will slaughter you, in a way that has never been seen before . If you see him (the Mahdi), give him your allegiance, even by
crawling over snow, because he is the Caliph, the Mahdi." (Ibn Maja, Musnad Ahmad, Al-Haakim's Sahiha, Al-Zahabi, Ibn Kathir's
Niyaha fi Al-Fitan wa Al-Malahim , Abu Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan, Muhammad Al-Barzanji's
Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a ) The statement in this Hadith: " they will slaughter you, in a way that has never been seen before " is hard to understand and accept so we raise doubt about its authenticity.
Abdullah bin Masood narrated that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said : "A group of people will come from the East with Black Flags and they will ask for some “Khair” (financial assistance, share in wealth, weapons, etc.), but they will not be given what they ask for. So, they will fight and win against those people (who didn’t give them what they asked). Now, they will be given them what they asked for, but they will not accept it until they hand it over to a person from my Ahl Bayt (family) who will fill it (the Earth) with justice just as they filled it (the Earth) with oppression. So, whoever of you will be alive at that time should come to them (the Mahdi & People from the East with black flags) even by crawling over snow". (Ibn Maja, Muhammad Al-Barzanji's Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
Ali bin AbuTalib narrated that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said:
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ( ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺮ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺙ ﺑﻦ ﺣﺮﺍﺙ , ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺭ , ﻳﻮﻃﻲﺀ ﺍﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺶ ﻟﺮﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻭﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﺮﻩ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺎﺑﺘﻪ
"A man called Al-Harith bin Harrath will come forth from Ma Wara an-Nahr (Transoxiana, meaning the region, between the Amu Darya and Syr Darya rivers, which includes Uzbekistan and Tajikistan, bordering Afghanistan ). His army will be led by a man called Mansur
who will make matters ready and enabled for Muhammad's family as Quraish enabled matters for the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ . Every believer must help him, or he (the Prophet) said: 'respond to him ( to his calls)'." (Sunan Abu Dawud, Sunan AnNisa-ee, and Al-Buhaiqi) Ibn Khaldoon has commented that one of the narrators of this Hadith, Haroon bin Al-Mughira is a descendant of Shia (or has some Shia background), so this would weaken the authenticity of the Hadith.
Abdullah bin Al-Harith bin Jiz Al-Zubaidi said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said : "People from the East will come to assist the Mahdi in laying the foundation for his dominion." (Ibn Maja, Tabarani)
Abu Hurairah says that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "(Armies carrying) black flags will come from Khorasan . No power will be able to stop them and they will finally reach ﺇﻳﻠﻴﺎﺀ Eelya (Jerusalem) where they will erect their flags" . (Tirmizi)
Amr Bin Marra Al-Jamli said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: " 'Surely, Black Flags will appear from the Khorasan until a group (of them) will tie their horse leashes to the Olive Trees between Beit-Lahia (in Gaza district, Palestine) and Harasta (near Damascus, Syria) .' We asked: 'Are there any Olive trees between these places?' He said, 'If there isn’t any, then, soon (Olive trees) will grow so that those people (of Khorasan) will come and tie their horses there'.” (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan p. 215 )
Buraida said that Messenger of Allah
ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "After me, there will be many expeditions (armies). You should be in (or with) the expeditions (armies) of (coming from) Khorasan. " ( Jalal-uddine AsSuyuti's Al-Urf Al-Wardi fi Akhbar Al-Mahdi , a part of Al-Hawi li Al-Fatawa )
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ( ﻙ ) ﻧﻌﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﺩ ( 894 ) ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ :
ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ , ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﺍﺩﺀ , ﻗﻼﻧﺴﻬﻢ ﺳﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺛﻴﺎﺑﻬﻢ ﺑﻴﺾ , ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﻢ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ : ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ [ ﺑﻦ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ] , ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻢ , ﻳﻬﺰﻣﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺰﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺱ , ﻭ ﻳﻮﻃﺊ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺳﻠﻄﺎﻧﻪ , ﻭﻳﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ , ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻭﺳﺒﻌﻮﻥ ﺷﻬﺮﺍ
Muhammad bin Al-Hanafia, said: " A black banner (army battalion) of Bani Al-Abbas ( family of Prophet Mohammad's ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ uncle, Al-Abbas) will come out . Then, another black banner (army battalion) will come from Khorasan. Their turbans are black and their clothes are white. At their front end will be a man named Shuayb bin Salih , from Tamim (tribe) . They will defeat the supporters of the Sufyani (and proceed further) until he (Shuayb bin Salih) arrives to Jerusalem (where) he will lay the foundation for the Mahdi's (future) dominion. He will be supplied with three hundred (men) from AshSham (Syria). From the time, he comes out (from Khorasan) until he hands over the matter (rule) to the Mahdi, there will be seventy two months (six years) ." (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan)
Saeed (or Sayyid) bin Al-Musayyab reported: "Black Banners will come from the East from the descendants of Al-Abbas. They will remain for whatsoever Allah wishes. Then, small Black Banners from the East will come to fight a man from the descendants of Abu Sufyan . They will give their allegiance to the Mahdi."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻋﺒﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺠﻌﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺃﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻴﺦ ﺃﺩﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﻠﻴﺔ [ ﻭ ] ﻗﺪ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﺟﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﻗﻮﺍ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻮﺍ ﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﻓﺎﻃﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻮﺍ ﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻮﺍ ﻷﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ
Al-Walid bin Muslim narrated based on an old man: "If the black banners split into 3 groups: a group calling for the progeny of Fatima (to rule the Muslims), a group calling for the progeny of the Abbas, and a group calling for (the kingship to be) for themselves..." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻯ ﺃﺭﻡ ﻭﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺴﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: "When the black banners differ among each other, a town/city of the towns/cities of Iram and the western side of its Mosque collapses. Then, in AshSham, three banners (armies) come out for each of the As'Hab (reddish white man), Abqa', and Sufyani. The Sufyani comes from AshSham and the Abqa' from Egypt. The Sufyani will defeat them." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺮ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺟﻌﻔﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻢ ﺑﻜﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻪ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻳﻘﺎﺗﻞ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ
ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺰﻣﻬﻢ
Abi Ja'far said: "A young man from Bani Hashem (Prophet Mohammad's
ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ family clan) with a mark in the palm of his right hand comes out from Khorasan with black banners. Between his hands (meaning assisting him) will be Shuayb bin Salih. He fights the followers of the Sufyani and defeats them." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﺧﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺷﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﺻﻄﺨﺮ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ
ﻭﺗﻬﺮﺏ ﺧﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻭﻳﻄﻠﺒﻮﻧﻪ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: "If Sufyani's Cavalry marsh to Kufa, the people of Khorasan will be requested to come to aid. The people of Khorasan will come out seeking the Mahdi. So, the Hashimi with an army carrying black banners, at its front end is Shuayb bin Salih, will meet the followers of the Sufyani at Istakhar Gate and a great battle will occur between them. The black banners will be victorious. Sufyani's Cavalry will run away. At that time, people will wish for the Mahdi (to appear) and ask for him." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
Al Zuhari who said " The black flags will come from the East, led by mighty men, with long hair and beards, their last names are taken from the names of their home towns and their first names are from a Kunya (nick name, usually starts with 'Abu', which means 'father of'' )." (Nuaim bin Hammad’s Kitab Al-Fitan )
Ammar binYasir said: " When the Sufyani reaches Kufa and kills the supporters of the family of Muhammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ , the Mahdi will come and the bearer of his Banner will be Shuayb, the son of Salih." (Nuaim bin Hammad’s Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﺡ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﺮ ﻭﻳﺪﻋﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻢ ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﻨﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻬﻠﻚ
Ibn Masud said: " A man from Mawali appears and calls for (the dominion to be for) Bani Hashem (Prophet Mohammad's ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ family clan). He is called Abdullah. He will rule for 4 years and then die." (Nuaim bin Hammad’s
Kitab Al-Fitan )
14) The emergence of A'raj coming from Al-Maghreb
The following Hadith prophesies the emergence of a man who is described as A'raj coming from Al-Maghreb. In our End Times book , we identify the person who will most likely be the first evil person to appear in the beginning of the first phase of the End Times. The numerical value of his first plus his last name is equal to the numerical value of the Arabic word ﺃﻋﺮﺝ A'raj .
The word A'raj means a limper, someone who cannot walk normally. However, this evil person does not have to be an A'raj physically. It is likely that the reason he is described in the Hadith as an A'raj is simply to allow us to know his real name, by calculating the numerical value of his name. Furthermore, Al-Maghreb in this Hadith is not likely to be intended to refer to Al-Maghreb region that includes Morocco, Algeria, and Tunis. In our book, we explain what is meant by ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ Al-Maghreb based on our numerical value of this word :
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﻱ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺃﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻋﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺓ
Reported on a chain of transmission on the authority of Ka'b: " The sign of the coming-out of the Mahdi is (army) battalions coming from Al-Maghreb , led by man who is an A'raj from Kinda." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan page 205)
15) Khusf (Land Collapse) in a village/city called Harasta
"The Earth will swallow a village called Harasta near Damascus."
(Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻋﺴﺎﻛﺮ ( 216\2 ) ﻋﻦ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﻳﻬﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ , ﺛﻢ ﻳﻬﻠﻚ , ﻭﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻮﻃﺔ , ﺗﺴﻤﻰ : ﺣَﺮَﺳْﺘَﺎ
Khaled bin Ma'daan said: "Sufyani defeats the group twice, then perishes. The Mahdi will not come out until a Khusf (land collapse) occurs in a village in Ghawta called Harasta." (Ibn A'sakir)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻯ ﺇﺭﻡ ﻭﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺴﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: "When the black banners differ among each other, a village from the villages of Iram and the western side of its Mosque collapses. Then, in AshSham, three banners (armies) come out for each of the As'Hab (reddish, white man), Abqa', and Sufyani. The Sufyani comes from AshSham and the Abqa' from Egypt. The Sufyani will defeat them." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺥﺳﻒ ﻗﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺭﻡ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﺳﺘﺎ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻢ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺃﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺠﺪ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻓﺒﻴﻨﺎﻫﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﻈﺮﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﺎﺟﻴﺒﻪ ﺇﺫ ﺭﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻌﺮ ﻏﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﺳﺘﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺛﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻠﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﺧﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻴﻘﺎﺗﻞ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺮﺩﻫﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ
16) Two thirds of the World Population could die before the Mahdi ( Note, the following Hadiths are weak ! )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺿﻤﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺷﻮﺫﺏ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺳﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
Ibn Sirene said: "The Mahdi does not appear until seven out of every nine (human beings) die." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺭ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺛﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﻻﻱ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺳﻤﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﺛﻠﺚ ﻭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺛﻠﺚ ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: "The Mahdi does not appear until one third (of people) are killed, one third dies (probably due to natural disasters), and one third remains." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻭﻫﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﺑﻦ ﺟﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﺨﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻴﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ
K'ab said: " The Earth will be devastated 40 years before AshSham (Greater Syria)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺬﻟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻜﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﺏ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺳﻤﻌﺖ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﻒ ﺃﻣﺔ ﺳﺘﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮ ﻭﺃﻭﻝ ﺷﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﻫﻼﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻫﻠﻜﺖ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺳﻠﻜﻪ
17) The Shia's Books mention an additional sign
The Construction of Two Bridges:
The Shia believe the first bridge is the bridge that connects Saudi Arabia to Bahrain which was completed in 1986. The second bridge they expect it to be the proposed bridge that will connect Saudi Arabia to Egypt. It is proposed to be a 50-kilometer bridge -- one foot at Ras Hamid in Northern Saudi Arabia, the other at Egypt’s tourism center Sharm el-Sheikh) . So far, Egypt has rejected the construction of such a bridge under pressure from Israel and the U.S. On the other hand, construction of a bridge connecting Qatar to Bahrain is expected to start this year, in 2010 and to be completed within 4-5 years.
18) Prophecy in the Bible
The following prophecy in Isaiah 19: 16-25 of the Bible seems to correspond very well with the signs preceding the advent of the Mahdi mentioned above:
(a) Verse 17 talks about Israel attacking Egypt. This could be either a reference to Israel's attack on Egypt in 1967 or an attack that will happen in the future.
(b) Verse 18 mentions that Egyptians will be speaking language of Canaan which indicates that they will speaking a new language that ancient Egyptian did not speak. Canaan is the region that includes Lebanon and Palestine, where people speak Arabic, and previously Aramaic used to be spoken there which is also a Semitic language, very similar to Arabic. So, we sense that this prophecy is talking about events at the end of time.
(c) Heliopolis mentioned in verse 18 is a suburb of today's Cairo .
(d) Verse 19 mentions a sign and a pillar which could be the sign and column of fire or light we discussed above.
(e) Verse 20 talks about God sending the Egyptians a saviour from oppression. This saviour could be the Mahdi.
(f) Verse 23 says that there will be a highway from Egypt to Assyria. Assyria includes Syria, Lebanon, Palestine, Jordan, Iraq, and Northern Saudi Arabia. This highway could be the proposed bridge Sharm el-Sheikh in Egypt to Ras Hamid in Northern Saudi Arabia which as we have indicated above is one of signs, mentioned in Shia books, for the advent of the Mahdi.
Isaiah 19: 16-25 :
16In that day shall Egypt be like unto women: and it shall be afraid and fear because of the shaking of the hand of the LORD of hosts, which he shaketh over it.
17And the land of Judah (meaning Israel) will bring terror to the Egyptians; everyone to whom Judah is mentioned will be terrified, because of what the LORD Almighty is planning against them.
18In that day shall five cities in the land of Egypt speak the language of Canaan, and swear to the LORD of hosts; one shall be called, the City of Destruction ( some manuscripts of the Bible mention Heliopolis or City of the Sun).
19In that day shall there be an altar to the LORD in the midst of the land of Egypt, and a pillar at the border thereof to the LORD.
20And it shall be for a sign and for a witness unto the LORD Almighty in the land of Egypt: for they shall cry unto the LORD because of the oppressors, and he shall send them a Saviour , and a great one , and he shall deliver them.
21And the LORD shall be known to Egypt, and the Egyptians shall know the LORD in that day, and shall do sacrifice and oblation; yea, they shall vow a vow unto the LORD, and perform it.
22And the LORD shall smite Egypt:
he shall smite and heal it : and they shall return even to the LORD, and he shall respond to their pleas and heal them.
23In that day shall there be a highway out of Egypt to Assyria , and the Assyrian shall come into Egypt, and the Egyptian into Assyria, and the Egyptians shall serve with the Assyrians.
24In that day shall Israel be the third with Egypt and with Assyria, even a blessing in the midst of the land:
25Whom the LORD of hosts shall bless, saying, Blessed be Egypt my people , and Assyria the work of my hands , and Israel mine inheritance.
Sequence of Signs preceding the Mahdi
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺯﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺯﺭﻳﺮﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺎﺳﺮ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﻣﺎﺕ
ﺧﻠﻴﻔﺘﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻓﻴﺨﻠﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﻭﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻐﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﺪ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ
Amar bin Yusr said: "The sign of the Mahdi is: The Turks (possibly Russians or Americans) sweep down against you. Your Caliph who seeks wealth dies and you elect a successor after him who is weak so he gets deposed after 2 years from the Bay'a. A Khusf (land collapse) occurs in the West end of Damascus mosque (refers to Al-Aqsa Mosque in Jerusalem). The emergence of three individuals (
probably: Abqa' , Ash-Hab, and Sufyani) in AshSham (Greater Syria). The attack of People of the West on Egypt. This is (the beginning of) the reign of the Sufyani." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻓﺄﺧﺒﺮﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﻦ ﺑﺨﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺧﻠﺘﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﺋﻞ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﻦ ﺑﺨﺖ ﻭﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻛﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺀ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ
Mak-hul said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: " In the sky, there is an Aya (sign) for two nights passed. In (the month of)
Shawwal , there will be Mahmaha ( murmuring). In (the month of) Zul-Qi'da , there will be a clash. In (the month of) Zul-Hijja , there will be fighting. In (the month of) Al-Muharram: What is prohibited !
Abdul-Wahhab bin Bakht said that he was informed that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "In
Ramadan, there will be an Aya (sign) in the sky like an illuminating column (pillar). In Shawwal , there will be Bala' (calamity). In Zul-Qida , there will be perishing. In Zul-Hijja , pilgrims will be robbed. In Al-Muharram, What is prohibited ! "
(Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺒﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺷﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻦ ﺍﺑﻲ ﺳﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻮﺷﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻬﻤﻬﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻓﻲ
ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻻ ﺇﻥ ﺻﻔﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻔﻪ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻓﺎﺳﻤﻌﻤﻮﺍ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺃﻃﻴﻌﻮﺍ
Shaher bin Hawshab was informed that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "In (the month of)
Ramadan, there will be a sound. In
(the month of) Shawwal , there will be a Mahmaha (murmuring). In (the month of) Zul-Qi'da , there will be a fighting among tribes. In (the month of) Zul-Hijja , the pilgrim will be robbed (looted). In (the month of) Al-Muharram , a caller from Heaven calls: 'The choice of Allah is this person, so listen to him and obey him'." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻭﻫﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ
ﻗﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻲ ﻫﺮﻳﺮﺓ ﺭﺿﻯﺎﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ
ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺼﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺴﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮﻱ ﺭﺑﻴﻊ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺭﺟﺐ ﺛﻢ ﻧﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺒﺔ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺳﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻐﻞ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻟﻒ
Abu Hurayrah (r.a) said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said:
"There will be an Aya (sign) in (the month of) Ramadan. Then, there will 'isabah (splitting into groups) in
Shawwal . Then, there will be fighting in (the month of) Zul-Qi'da. Then, the pilgrim will be robbed in (the month of) Zul-Hijja . Then, the prohibitions will be violated in (the month of) Al-Muharram . Then, there will be sound in (the month of) Safar, then the tribes will conflict with each other in the two months of Rabi ( first Rabi and second Rabi) . Then, the most amazing thing will happen between (the months of)
Jumada and Rajab. Then, a well-fed she-camel will be better than a fortress (castle) sheltering a thousand (people)." (Al-Haakim , Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺄﺓ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺬﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﻴﻊﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻫﻼﻙ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻑ ﻭﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﻭﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺟﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﺮﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻠﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺎﺩ ﺭﺃﺳﺎﻫﺎ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻬﺎﺏ ﻳﻨﻘﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻭﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻼﺀ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ
Ka'b said: "The perishing (end) of Bani Al-Abbas (the progeny of Al-Abbas) will be once a star appears in Jawf (region), and a Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) and Wahiya (catastrophe). All of this in the month of Ramadan. The redness will be between the 5th and 20th of Ramadan. The Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) is between the middle and the 20th (of Ramadan). The Wahiya (catastrophe) is between the 20th and 24th (of Ramadan). A star thrown (by Allah from Heaven)
illuminates like a moon and then turns like a snake until its ends meet.
Two tremors will be in the night of Fis'hain. The star thrown (by Allah from Heaven) is a Shahab (asteroid) that rushes from the sky with a powerful sound when it drops in the East and because of it, people will experience magnificent disasters." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺷﻴﺦ ﻋﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻋﻲ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻌﻘﻒ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻗﺤﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﻭﺣﻤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺕ ﻓﺎﺷﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻠﺔ
Ka'b said: "The end of the kingship of
Bani Al-Abbas (the progeny of Al-Abbas) is redness in the sky which occurs between the 10th to 15th of Ramadan. A Wahiya (catastrophe) between the 20th and 24th of Ramadan and a star coming from the East that illuminates like a moon in a full moon night, then it turns. Also Ka'b said: "Drought in the East, Wahiya (catastrophe) in the West, redness in the Jawf (Interior), death that spreads (perhaps due to contagious diseases) in Qibla (Mecca)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
Abdullah ibn Umar said: While we were sitting with the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ , he mentioned the Fitan (strifes, trials & tribulations) , mentioning many of them until he mentioned the Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) of Ahlaas. Someone asked him: ' O Messenger of Allah, what is the "Ahlaas" Fitna? He said ' It is fleeing and plunder. Then, will come Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) of AsSarra': its smoke is under the feet of a man (descendant) from my household (family) , who claims he is of me ( my follower), but he is not because my Awlyia (followers or loyalists) are those who fear God. Then, the people will choose a man (to be a leader) who will be like a hip-bone on a rib (meaning he will not be able to hold a firm leadership grip) . Then, the
Duhaima (Dark & Cunning that catches people off guard) Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) that will not leave anyone without slapping him a slap (testing his faith); if people say it is finished, it stays longer; a man who is in the morning a Mu'min (Believer) by the the evening becomes a Kafir (Disbeliever), until people will be divided into two factions: a faction of Iman (faithfulness in belief) without hypocrisy and a faction of hypocrisy without Iman (faithfulness in belief). When this happens, expect the (Fitna of) Dajjal that day or the next day'." ( Sunan Abu Dawud, Al-Haakim, and Al-Zahabi)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ
ﻋﻦ ﺣﺬﻳﻔﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺟﺎﻝ
Huzaifa said: " The Fitan (strifes) after the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ until the Hour (of Resurrection) are four : the first is 5 (years or months), the second is 20 (years or months), the third is 20 (years or months), the fourth is the Dajjal (Anti-Christ)." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﻴﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
ﻭﺫﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ
ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻚ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ
Ka'b said: "There will be around the Euphrates , near AshSham ( Syria) or a little beyond it, a great assembly (of armies). They will fight each other over wealth, and seven out of every nine will be killed. And that will be after the Al-Hadda
(demolition) and the Al-Wahiya (catastrophe) in the month of
Ramadan, and after the split resulting in three banners (battalions or armies), each (head of a battalion or army) will seek the kingship (or possession of the wealth or treasure) for himself, among them is a man whose name is 'Abdullah." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺘﺒﻴﻊ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﺟﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺪﺏ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻢ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺒﺮﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺘﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
Ka'b said: "After two tremors (or disasters) occur in the month of Ramadan, three individuals from the same Household (family) spring forth (vying for kingship). One of them is vying for it by force, another one asking for it by piety, calmness, and dignity, and the third vying for it by killing and his name is Abdullah. There will be near the Euphrates river a great assembly for battle, where they will fight for the money (wealth or treasures). Seven out of every nine will be killed." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﺟﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺟﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻴﻤﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻫﺮﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺠﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺠﻠﻲ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺣﺴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻫﺐ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
Abu Huraira said: "The fourth Fitna (strife) remains for 12 years , then it clears . Once it clears, the
Euphrates will recede revealing a mountain of gold. Seven out of every nine (people fighting for it) will be killed." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitana
Warning: Many of the narrations on this page could be weak.
Abu Saeed al-Khudri has reported that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: ''He (Mahdi) will be sent at a time of intense disputes and differences among people and disasters.'' (Ahmad)
1) A Sound (Blast) in Ramadan
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ( ﻙ ) ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﻲ ( 519 ) ﻋﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻮﺷﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ :
)) ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ , ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ [ ﻣﻬﻤﻬﺔ ] , ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ , ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻪ [ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺐ ] ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ ﻳﻜﺜﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﻠﻰ , ﻭﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺎﺀ , ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﺩﻣﺎﺅﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺮﺓ , ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻬﺮﺏ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﻬﻢ , ﻓﻴﺆﺗﻰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ , ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻳﻊ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﻩ , ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ : ﺇﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻘﻚ , ﻳﺮﺿﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ
Shahr ibn Hawshab said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ stated: “There will be a Sound in (the Hijri Islamic month of ) Ramadan, a
Mahmaha (murmuring) in (the Hijri Islamic month of) Shawwal , and war among tribes (peoples) in (the Hijri Islamic month of) Zul-Qi’dah and its sign will be that
pilgrims will be robbed (looted). There will be a war with many people killed and blood will be shed in Mina (near Mecca), such that their blood flows on the Jamra (Stone of Satan at which pilgrims throw stones).” (Abu Amru Uthman bin Saeed Ad-Dani's
Kitab Al-Sunan Al-Waredah fi al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺣﺴﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻬﻤﺪﺍﻧﻲ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺴﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻳﻘﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺎ ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺮﺟﺎ ﻫﺮﺟﺎ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﻗﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺗﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻭﺭﻫﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻻﺯﻝ ( ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺩ ) ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺻﻠﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﺎﺩﺧﻠﻮﺍ ﺑﻴﻮﺗﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻘﻮﺍ
ﺃﺑﻮﺍﺑﻜﻢ ﻭﺳﺪﻭﺍ ﻛﻮﺍﻛﻢ ﻭﺩﺛﺮﻭﺍ ﺃﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻭﺳﺪﻭﺍ ﺁﺫﺍﻧﻜﻢ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﺨﺮﻭﺍ ﻟﻠﻪ ﺳﺠﺪﺍ ﻭﻗﻮﻟﻮﺍ ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﺭﺑﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺠﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻠﻚ
Abdullah ibn Mas'ud [r.a.] said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said:
"When there is a Sayha (scream) in
Ramadan, then there will be turmoil in Shawwal , and the tribes will form groups in Zul-Qi'da, and blood will be spilled in Zul-Hijja, and in Al-Muharram! What is prohibited?" saying it three times, "Oh, Oh! The people will be killed in a great massacres." He said: "We said: "What is the Sayha (scream) , O Messenger of Allah?" He said: "This will be in the middle of Ramadan, on a Friday morning. That will be when the month of Ramadan begins on a Friday night. There will be a Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) that will awaken one who is asleep, and bring the young women out of their rooms, on a Friday night during a year of many earthquakes (and very cold) . So when Ramadan begins on a Friday night in that year, then when you have prayed Fajr on Friday in the middle of Ramadan, then enter your houses, close your doors, block your windows, cover yourselves, and block your ears. When you sense the scream, fall down in prostration to Allah and say: "Subhanal-Quddus, subhanal-Quddus, rabbunal-Quddus (Glory be to the Most Holy, glory be to the Most Holy, our Lord is the Most Holy)." For whoever does that will survive, and whoever does not will perish."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan, Hadith )
ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻠﻤﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﻟﻮﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻪ ﺃﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺑﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻳﺼﻌﻖ ﻟﻪ ﺳﺒﻌﻮﻥ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ ﻭﻳﺼﻢ ﺳﺒﻌﻮﻥ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﻮﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺘﻚ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺑﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺫ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺠﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺒﺮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﻄﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﻳﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻪ ﺑﻼﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺘﻲ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺝ ﻷﻣﺘﻲ . ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﺘﺒﻬﺎ ﻳﻨﺠﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺳﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻐﻞ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻟﻒ
Fairouz Al-Dailami said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ
said: " In, Ramadan, there will be a
Sound (or voice) . They said: O Messenger of Allah, is it in its beginning, in its middle, or in its end ? He said: No, in the middle of Ramadan. If the night of the middle is Friday, there will be a sound from the sky that causes death to 70 thousand and causes deafness to 70 thousand. They asked: 'O Messenger of Allah, who will survive from your Umma (nation)? ' He said: 'Whoever stays at home, seeks refuge (to Allah) through Sujud (prostration), and openly declares Takbir of Allah ('Allah Akbar'). Then, another sound will follow it. The first sound is the voice of (angel) Gabriel and the second sound is the voice of Satan. The sound is in Ramadan, the disturbance is in Shawwal, the tribes (or nations) form into warring groups in Zul-Qi'da, and it is feared for the pilgrim in Zul-Hijja. In Al-Muharram, what is prohibited in Muharram? Its beginning is calamity on my Umma (nation) and its end is a relief to my Umma. A Rahila (an animal or mode of transportation) that may save him is better than a fortress (castle) that shelters one thousand. " (Tabarani, Abu Amru Ad-Dani, Al-Haithami's Mujama Al-Zawa'id)
ﺃﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻈﺮﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺃﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻰ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺰﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﻋﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ : ﺇﻥ ﻧَّﺸَﺄْ ﻧُﻨَﺰِّﻝْ ﻋَﻠَﻴْﻬِﻢ ﻣِّﻦ ﺍﻟﺴَّﻤَﺎﺀ ﺁﻳَﺔً ﻓَﻈَﻠَّﺖْ ﺃَﻋْﻨَﺎﻗُﻬُﻢْ ﻟَﻬَﺎ ﺧَﺎﺿِﻌِﻴﻦَ . ﺁﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﻔﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﻘﻈﺎﻥ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: " Wait for the end of misery once three things occur." We said: What are they, O' Prince of Believers? He said: "The dispute among the people of AshSham (Greater Syria), the Black Banners (battalions carrying black banners), and the Qaz'a in the month of Ramadan. It was asked: "What is the Qaz'a ? He said: "Haven't you heard what Allah said in the Quran (26:4): ﺇﻥ ﻧَّﺸَﺄْ ﻧُﻨَﺰِّﻝْ ﻋَﻠَﻴْﻬِﻢ ﻣِّﻦ ﺍﻟﺴَّﻤَﺎﺀ ﺁﻳَﺔً ﻓَﻈَﻠَّﺖْ ﺃَﻋْﻨَﺎﻗُﻬُﻢْ ﻟَﻬَﺎ ﺧَﺎﺿِﻌِﻴﻦ َ 'If We wish, We can send down to them from
Heaven a sign, such that their necks remain surrendered to it (mesmerized in amazement).' This Aya (sign) that makes a girl come out of her bedroom, wakes up the person who is asleep, and frightens the one who is awake." (Ibn Al-Shajari's Al-Amali Al-Shajaria)
ﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻖ
ﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﺎ
ﻳﻠﻴﻬﻢ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: "During the time of the second Sufyani who is physically deformed, a Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) will occur in AshSham (Greater Syria) such that each people will think it is the devastation of other people next to them." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan)
2) The Battle in Mina
Before the Mahdi emerges, an inter-tribal fight will take place. In the same year, Muslim Pilgrims will be looted and a battle will erupt in Mina (near Mecca) in which many people will be killed.
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ( ﻙ ) ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ( 987 ) ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﻗﺎﻝ :
ﻳﺤﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺎ , ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ , ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺇﻣﺎﻡ , ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ , ﺇﺫ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﻜﻠﺐ , ﻓﺜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ , ﻓﺎﻗﺘﺘﻠﻮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺔ ﺩﻣﺎ , ﻓﻴﻔﺰﻋﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺮﻫﻢ , ﻓﻴﺄﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻌﺒﺔ ﻳﺒﻜﻲ , ﻛﺄﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ [ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ] ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻣﻮﻋﻪ , ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ : ﻫﻠﻢ ( ﺇﻟﻴﻨﺎ ) ﻓﻠﻨﺒﺎﻳﻌﻚ , ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻝ : ﻭﻳﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻬﺪ ﻧﻘﻀﺘﻤﻮﻩ؟ , ﻭﻛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻡ [ ﻗﺪ ] ﺳﻔﻜﺘﻤﻮﻩ ؟ , ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﺮﻫﺎ , ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﺩﺭﻛﺘﻤﻮﻩ ﻓﺒﺎﻳﻌﻮﻩ , ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ , ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ( ﻙ ) ﻧﻌﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﺩ ( 986 ) , ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻛﻢ ( 8584\503\4 ) ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺑﻦ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ :
ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺗَﺠَﺎُﺩُﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ , ﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺌﺬ ﻳﻨﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ , [ ﻓﻴﻜﺜﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﻠﻰ , ﻭﺗﺴﻔﻚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺎﺀ , ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﺩﻣﺎﺅﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺮﺓ ] , ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻬﺮﺏ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﺆﺗﻰ ﺑﻪ , ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ , ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻳﻊ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﻩ , [ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ : ﺇﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻘﻚ ] , ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻳﻌﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﺪﺭ , ﻳﺮﺿﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ
Amr bin Shuaib reported from his grandfather that the Messenger of Allah (Prophet Mohammad) ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said, ' 'In Zul-Qa'da
(Islamic month), there will be fight among the tribes, Muslim pilgrims will be looted and there will be a battle in Mina in which many people will be slain and blood will flow until it runs over the Jamarat Al-Aqba (one of the three stone pillars at Mina). The man they seek will flee and will be found between the Rukn (a corner of the Ka'ba containing the Black Stone) and the Maqam of Prophet Abraham (near Ka'ba). He will be forced to accept people's Bay'a (being chosen as a Leader/Caliph). The number of those offering Bay'a will be the same as the number of the people of Badr (Muslim fighters who participated in the Battle of Badr at time of Prophet Mohammad). Then, the dweller of Heaven and the dweller of the Earth will be pleased with him. ' (Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
Abu Huraira [r.a] said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "There will be a Hadda (a blast or a powerful, hammering sound) in
Ramadan that will awaken one who is asleep, and terrify one who is awake. Then, there will appear a group ['isaba] in Shawwal , then bloodshed in (the month of) Zul-Hijjah . Then the prohibitions will be violated in (the month of) Al-Muharram . Then, there will be death in (the month of) Safar. Then the tribes will quarrel with each other in
(the month of) Rabi' , then the most amazing thing will happen between
(the months of) Jumada and Rajab. Then, a well-fed she-camel will be better than a castle sheltering a thousand." (Al-Haakim)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺳﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻚ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺑﻦ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﺟﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻋﺎﻣﺌﺬ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ ﻳﻜﺜﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺎﺀ ﻭﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺮ
Amro bin Shu'aib mentioned that
the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: : "There will be rebellion in (the month of) Shawwal , talk of war in (the month of) Zul-Qa'da and war itself in (the month of) Zul-Hijja . Pilgrims will be robbed, and blood will flow over the Jamrat Al-Aqaba (one of the three stone pillars at Mina). (Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book
Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
3) The Euphrates River will uncover a Mountain of Gold
(something very valuable)
The Final Hour will not come until the Euphrates river (which originates in Taurus Mountains in Turkey, flows through Syria and Iraq and ends in the Arabian/ Persian Gulf) will uncover a treasure (something very valuable) over which people will fight and die. It should be noted that this is a sign, which will precede the Mahdi only according to some Muslim scholars. Abu Huraira reported that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said, ''The Hour shall not occur until the Euphrates will uncover a mountain of gold over which people will fight . Ninety-nine out of one hundred shall be killed and each one of them will say 'Perhaps, I shall be the one to succeed'.'' (Sahih Muslim). Another narration says that whoever is present at the time when the Euphrates uncovers a mountain of gold should not take the gold.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﻴﻊ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻭﺫﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻚ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻝﻟﻪ
Ka'b said: "There will be around the Euphrates , near AshSham ( Syria or Damascus) or a little after it, a great assembly (of armies). They will fight each other over wealth, and seven out of every nine will be killed. And that will be after the Al-Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) and the Al-Wahiya (catastrophe) in the month of Ramadan, and after the split resulting in three banners (battalions or armies), each (head of a battalion or army) will seek the kingship (reign) for himself, among them is a man whose name is 'Abdullah." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﺟﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺟﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻴﻤﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻫﺮﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺠﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺠﻠﻲ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺣﺴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻫﺐ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
Abu Huraira said: "The fourth Fitna (strife) remains for 12 years , then it clears . Once it clears, the
Euphrates will recede revealing a mountain of gold. Seven out of every nine (people fighting for it) will be killed." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
4) Eclipses
- Muhammad ibn Ali ibn Al-Hanafiyyah said: “For our Mahdi, there will be two signs that have never occurred since the creation of the heavens and the Earth: The moon will be eclipsed (lunar eclipse) on the first night of Ramadan, and the sun will be eclipsed (solar eclipse) in its middle (of Ramadan).” (Imam al Akbar Ali bin Umar Al-Daraqutni's
Sunan Al-Daraqutni )
- “ There are two signs for the Mahdi… The first one is the lunar eclipse on the first night of Ramadan, and the second is the solar eclipse in the middle of this month.” (Ibn Hajar al-Haithami's book Al-Qawl al-Mukhtasar fi `Alamat al-Mahdi al-Muntazar, p. 47)
- “ Lunar eclipse will occur in the first night of the Ramadan. In the middle of the Ramadan, solar eclipse will occur.” (Muhammad Al-Barzanji, Al-Isha’ah li Ashrat AsSa'ah, p. 199 )
- “ During his reign, on the 14th of the Ramadan, solar eclipse will occur. On the 1st of that month, moon will darken…” (Imam Rabbani, Letters of Rabbani, 380; Letters of Rabbani , 2-1163)
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻧﻌﻴﻢ ( 642 ) ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ :
)) ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ((
- “There will be two solar eclipses in Ramadan before the Mahdi’s advent.” (Imam Qurtubi's book
Mukhtasar Tazkirah , p. 440 )
- “When you see it, then store up one year’s supply of food.” (Nuaim ibn Hammad’s book Kitab al-Fitan)
5) The Sun makes a Sign (or rises as a sign)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﻭﺍﺑﻦ ﺛﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﺍﻕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻃﺎﻭﻭﺱ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻄﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺁﻳﺔ
Ali bin Abdullah bin Abbas said:
"The Mahdi will not emerge until the Sun rises as a sign (or unless a sign emerges from the Sun)." (Al-Baihaqi, Al-Haakim, Al-Harbi, AsSuyuti, Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan , Ibn Hajar al-Haithami's book Al-Qawl al-Mukhtasar fi `Alamat al-Mahdi al-Muntazar, p. 47, Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi's book Al-Burhan fi Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir al-Zaman, p. 33 ) Another variation says a sign appears with the sun.
6) A Star with a tail appears from the East
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺮﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺟﻌﻔﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﻃﻠﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻃﻠﻊ ﺑﻬﻼﻙ ﻗﻮﻡ ﻧﻮﺡ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻏﺮﻗﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻭﻃﻠﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻫﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻭﺣﻴﻦ ﻗﺘﻞ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺯﻛﺮﻳﺎ
ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺎﺳﺘﻌﻴﺬﻭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻦ
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻠﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻻ ﻳﻠﺒﺜﻮﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﺑﻤﺼﺮ
Abi Ja'far said: "If the Abbas reaches Khorasan, (a star known as) Horn Zu-Shifa rises in the East. The first time it appeared was at the perishing of the people of (Prophet) Noah when Allah drowned them. And it rose at the time of (Prophet) Abraham, peace be upon him, when they cast him into fire, and when Allah caused Pharaoh (at the time of Moses) and those with him to perish, and when (Prophet) John (the Baptist) son of Zakariah was killed. If you see this, seek refuge in Allah against the evilness of Fitan (strifes and tribulations). It will rise after the eclipse of the sun and the moon. Then, soon the Abqa (a man seeking to rule) in Egypt will appear."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan, Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi's book
Al-Burhan fi `Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir az-Zaman, p. 32)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﺪﺃ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻟﻪ ﺫﻧﺎﺏ
Ibn Mas'ud said: "There will be a sign in (the month of) Safar and the star with a tail will begin ." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book
Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ
ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺭﺃﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻵﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻧﺠﻢ ﺍﻵﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﻨﻘﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﻓﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺑﻴﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺟﺐ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﻗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ
Al-Walid said: "The redness and stars we have seen are not the Ayat (signs). The star of the Ayat (signs) is a star that flips (or turns) in the horizons in (the month of ) Safar or in (the 2 months of) Rabi (the first and second Rabi), or in (the month of) Rajab. Once this happens, Khankan marshes the Turks (Russians); the Romans (Europeans) of Zawahir will follow with the banners (battalions) and Crosses." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺎﻝ ﻛﻌﺐ
ﻫﻮ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻷﻫﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻛﺈﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺭ
Ka'b said: "It is a star that rises from the East and illuminates for the people of the Earth like the illumination of a moon in a full-moon night." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book
Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺫﻧﺎﺏ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ
Ka'b said: “ 'A star will rise from the East before the appearance of the Mahdi and it has a tail.' And Sharik said: ' Before the appearance of the Mahdi, the sun will have an eclipse in the month of Ramadan twice.' ” (Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
"A star with a tail that illuminates all places will originate from the East, at
three or seven-day intervals."
(Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book Al-Isha'ah li Ashrat AsSaa'h )
7) Column of Fire or Light from the East
A huge fire from the East for 3 or 7 nights, darkness will be seen in the sky, and there will be a redness in the sky spread across the horizon, unlike the pink in the horizon with which we are familiar. (Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
ﺃﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮﻱ : ﺟ 2 ﺻ 27 ﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﺑﻦ ﻗﺎﺫﻭﻳﻪ ﻗﺎﻻ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺇﻣﻼﺀ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﺃﺣﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺇﺳﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ، ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﺮﻳﺔ ، ﻋﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻗﺎﺫﻭﻳﻪ : ﺁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺷﺒﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺄﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ . ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﻻﻫﻠﻚ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺔ . ﻗﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﺭ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ
Ibn Qazuwaih said that Kathir bin Murra said: " The Aya (sign) of the event of Ramadan will be a fire in the sky like the necks of camels or like iron columns. If you see it, prepare for your family food supplies for a year." Or perhaps he (Kathir bin Murra) said: "The Aya of the event is a column of fire originating from the sky." (Ibn Al-Shajari's Al-Amali Al-Shajaria)
ﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻗﺎﺫﻭﻳﻪ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺷﺒﻴﺐ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﻞ ، ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻧﺼﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ، ﻗﺎﻝ : ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﻳﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ
Ibn Qazuwaih said that Kathir bin Murra said: " The beginning of the Aya (sign) will be redness in the sky." (Ibn Al-Shajari's Al-Amali Al-Shajaria)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻤﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ
ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ
Kathir bin Murra said: " The Aya (sign) of the occurrence is in Ramadan, and commotion (disturbance) is in Shawwal, Nazail in Zul-Qa'da, fighting is in Zul-Hijja, and the Aya (sign) of this is an illuminating column of light in the sky." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﺄﻋﺪﻭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺟﻮﻉ
Khaded Bin Madan said: " If you see a column of fire from the East, in the month of Ramadan, in the sky, get food as much as you can, for it is (going to be) a year of starvation (famine)." (Tabarani, Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﻳﻮﻧﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺛﻮﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ
ﻋﻦ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭﺍ ﺁﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺭ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻳﺮﺍﻩ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻛﻠﻬﻢ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺃﺩﺭﻙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻠﻴﻌﺪ ﻷﻫﻠﻪ ﻃﻌﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺔ
Khaded Bin Madan said: " An Aya (sign) which is a column of fire rising from the East will appear that all people of the World will be able see. Whoever is present (alive) should arrange for his family food supply for one year." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
8) A Call and a Hand from Heaven
"A call in Ramadan that will be heard by each people in their own language, announcing the Mahdi's advent will awaken those who are asleep and alarm those that are awake."
(Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﻉ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ
ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻛﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﺃﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻣﻴﺮﻛﻢ ﻓﻼﻥ
Saeed bin Al-Musayab said: "There will be disunity and dispute until a hand from Heaven and a caller calls that your prince is this person." (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻭﻫﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻫﺸﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﻢ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻢ ﺑﻔﻼﻥ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﻊ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺸﻴﺮ
Saeed bin Al-Musayab said: "There will be a Fitna in AshSham. Its beginning will be like a play of boys. Then, the affairs of people will not settle on anything and unity will not be achieved until a caller calls from Heaven: 'Follow this person', and a hand appears as a sign." (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﺧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺘﺎﻝ ﻳﻮﻣﺌﺬ ﻳﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻻ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﻭﻗﺎﻟﺖ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﺖ ﻋﻤﻴﺲ : ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻔﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺪﻻﺓ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ
Al-Zuhri said: " When the Sufyani and the Mahdi meet to fight each other, a voice from Heaven will be heard saying: 'The people who are loyal to Allah are friends of this person, meaning Al-Mahdi.' Al-Zuhri said that Asma bint Omais said: 'The sign of this will be a hand dangling (extended) from Heaven that people will see'." ( Jalal-uddine AsSuyuti's
Al-Urf Al-Wardi fi Akhbar Al-Mahdi , a part of Al-Hawi li Al-Fatawa )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺑﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﻋﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺎﺯﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻻ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻴﺮﻛﻢ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻻ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻛﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻗﺘﺎﻻ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺍ ﻓﺠﻞ ﺳﻼﺣﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺫﻉ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺟﻴﺶ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺫﻉ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﻔﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻳﺸﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﺇﻻ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﺪﺭ ﻓﻴﺬﻫﺒﻮﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺎﻳﻌﻮﻥ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﻬﻢ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: "When people are in Mina and Arafat (near Mecca, for Hajj), after tribes split into parties, a caller will say "Your prince is this person". Another voice follows it saying: "He is lying". Then, another voice says: "It (first caller) said the truth." So, they will engage in fierce fight .... then you will see a hand dangling from Heaven. Then, the fight becomes even more fierce such that only the number of (Muslim) people who fought in Badr remains alive. So, they go to give Bay'a (allegiance) to the man (Mahdi)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺴﻒ ﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻟﺪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﻄﺎﻥ
Ali bin Abi Taleb said: " After the
Khusf (land collapse), a caller from Heaven calls: 'The truth is in the family of Mohammad ' in the beginning of the morning. Then, another caller at the end of the morning calls: 'The truth is in the progeny of Jesus.' This (second call) is from Satan." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan ) A variation of this narration is attributed to Abi Ja'far mentions that the second caller says that the truth is in the family of Jesus or Al-Abass and this second call from Satan from the bottom of the Earth.
Huzaifa said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said : "At that point, a call will come from Heaven saying: ' O' people, surely Allah forbids tyrants and their followers for you and (Allah) bestows leadership upon the best of the nation of Muhammad. Join him in Mecca -- he is the Mahdi !' " (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan , Tabarani, and Abu Amru Uthman bin Saeed Ad-Dani's Kitab Al-Sunan Al-Waredah fi Al-Fitan)
9) Clashes between Bani Hashem and Bani Umaya
Bani Hashem is the family clan to which Prophet Mohammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ belongs. It may also have been mentioned in the Hadith to signify the Shia, in general.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺃﻣﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﻴﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺃﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﺀ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ
Abi Qabil said: "A man will reign from Bani Hashem (meaning from the family of Prophet Mohammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ). He kills Bani Umaya until very few of them remain alive and does not kill except them. Then, a man from Bani Umaya rise up and kills for every man two until no body remains alive, except women. Then, the Mahdi appears." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺜﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﻋﻤﻦ ﺣﺪﺛﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺱ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺒﻠﻐﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻮﺕ
Al-Haytham bin Abd-Al-Rahman narrated based someone that Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.), who is the cousin, son-in-law, and the 4th successor (Caliph) of Prophet Mohammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: " A man will come out from the East before the Mahdi, from his Household (family), carrying a sword for 8 months, killing and maiming people. He heads toward Jerusalem and dies once he reaches (conquers) it." (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
Abdullah ibn Umar said: While we were sitting with the Messenger of Allah (Prophet Mohammad) , he mentioned the Fitan (strifes, trials & tribulations ), mentioning many of them until he mentioned the Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) of Ahlaas. Someone asked him: ' O Messenger of Allah, what is the "Ahlaas" Fitna? He said ' It is fleeing and plunder. Then, will come Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) of AsSarra': its smoke is under the feet of a man (descendant) from my household (family) , who claims he is of me ( my follower), but he is not because my Awlyia (followers or loyalists) are those who fear God.
Then, the people will choose a man (to be a leader) who will be like a hip-bone on a rib (meaning he will not be able to hold a firm leadership grip ). Then, the
Duhaima (Dark & Cunning that catches people off guard) Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) that will not leave anyone without slapping him a slap (testing his faith); if people say it is finished, it stays longer; a man who is in the morning a Mu'min (Believer) by the the evening becomes a Kafir (Disbeliever), until people will be divided into two factions: a faction of Iman (faithfulness in belief) without hypocrisy and a faction of hypocrisy without Iman (faithfulness in belief). When this happens, expect the (Fitna of) Dajjal that day or the next day'." ( Sunan Abu Dawud, Al-Haakim, and Al-Zahabi)
10) The Killing of the Good Soul
from Bani Hashem (& his brother or sister)
The good soul who will be killed is believed to be a man from Bani Hashem, meaning from the family clan of Prophet Mohammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ .
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺯﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﺯﺭﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺎﺳﺮ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﻮﻩ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺔ
ﻧﺎﺩﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻴﺮﻛﻢ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺣﻘﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻝﺍ
Amar bin Yasir said: "Once the good soul and his brother are killed, will be killed in Mecca, a caller from Heaven calls: Your prince is (says his name). This is the Mahdi who will fill Earth with equity and justice. "
(Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﻭﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺎﺵ ﻭﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺟﻌﻔﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ
ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻭﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﺃﺧﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻳﺶ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺼﻠﺒﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﺪ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﻪ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻭﻓﺎﻃﻤﺔ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said about what the Sufyani does in Mecca: "He (the Sufyani) kills two siblings from Bani Hashem of Quraish, a man and his sister, they are called Mohammad and Fatima. He crucifies them at the gate of the Masjid (in Mecca)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
11) The Emergence of the Sufyani and the Khusf (Land Collapse) in Bayda (near Mecca)
There are several WEAK narrations that seem to indicate that tyrant Muslim leader will emerge before the Mahdi in Syria and rule the Middle East. Some of these narrations refer to this tyrant leader as the Sufyani , meaning a descendant of Abu Sufyan. Some weak narration specify that the Sufyani's name will be Urwa bin Muhammad and his Kuniya (nick name) will be Abu-Utba. Some narrations even refer to two Sufyanis, not just one.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻮﺍﺩﻫﺎ
Abi Sadek said: " The Mahdi does not emerge until the Sufyani emerges on the ashes (of the Muslim nation)."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻴﺦ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ
Al-Zuhri said: "During the reign of the
second Sufyani, a sign in the sky will be seen." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻭﻫﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻓﺮﻱ ﺳﻤﻊ ﺃﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﺱ
ﺳﻤﻊ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺹ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺧﺴﻒ ﺑﺠﻴﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺪﺍﺀ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ
Abdullah bin Amr Ibn Al-Aas said:
"If a Khusf (land collapse) occurs to an army in Bayda (near Mecca), that will be the sign of the appearance of the Mahdi." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan) This sign indicates that person the army was sent to attack is the Mahdi.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺣﺒﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻴﻦ
Yazid bin Habib said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: " The coming out of the Sufyani is after thirty nine ." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺒﺮﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻜﺮﻣﺔ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺱ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺒﻊ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻜﻪ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻬﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻜﻪ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ
Ibn Abbas (r.a.) said: " If the coming out of the Sufyani is in thirty seven , his reign will be for 28 months. If he come out in thirty nine , his reign will be for 9 months." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ
Sulaiman bin Isa said: "I was told that the Sufyani will rule for three and a half years. " (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﻦ ﺣﺴﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺙ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ
ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﻤﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺩﺓ
Al-Harith bin Abdullah said: " A man from the progeny of Abi Sufyan comes out, from the drought valley, with (an army carrying) red banners. He has thin arms and thin legs, with long neck, very yellowish (meaning pale) in complexion, on him (can be seen) the mark or sign of worship." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan ) This narration most probably refers to the first Sufyani .
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﻴﻊ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮﺃﺓ ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺮ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ
Ka'b said: "He (Sufyani) will rule for the pregnancy period of a woman (meaning 9 months). His (Sufyani's) name is Abdullah bin Yazid and he is the Al-Azhar ibn Al-Kulaiba or Al-Zahri bin Al-Kulaiba, the physically deformed Sufyani." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﺘﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺮﺣﺔ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﻣﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻕ ﻭﺷﺠﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﺎﺯ
ﻣﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﻣﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺣﻤﺶ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺪﻳﻦ
ﻏﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﺓ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: " After Al-Azhar ibn Al-Kulaiba enters Kufa (in Iraq), he will suffer from Qarha (illness), so he leaves it, then dies on his way. Then, another man from them (Bani Al-Kulaiba or Sufyan) emerges (and succeeds him) from between Al-Taif and Mecca or between Mecca and Medina ... in Hijaz. He is physically deformed, has a flat face, strong arms, his eyes are inwardly set deep in his eye sockets. At his time, the Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) will occur." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﻬﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺧﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻴﻬﻢ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: "At the time of the second Sufyani, the Hadda
(powerful, hammering sound) occurs, such that every nation thinks the land or nation next to them was devastated." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﺡ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺒﺪﻯ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ
ﺑﺈﻳﻠﻴﺎ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻋﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ
Ibn Masud said: "A star (possibly Al-Tariq Star) begins. Then, a man who is Awar (has a deformed eye)
moves/roams around Eelya (Jerusalem or British Isles) . Then, the Khusf (land collapse) occurs. " (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﺡ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺈﻳﻠﻴﺎﺀ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻋﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻜﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﺝ ﻭﻳﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﻌﺚ ﺑﺠﻴﺶ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ
Ibn Masud said: " A man who is Awar (has a deformed eye) moves/roams around Eelya (Jerusalem or or British Isles). Killing increases. He makes ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎ (plundering and taking slaves) permissible. He is the one who sends the army to (attack) Medina."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻘﺎﺗﻞ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻓﻴﻬﺰﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻠﺴﻄﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻮﺍ ﻣﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺰﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺄﺗﻮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺺ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﻠﻐﻮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺑﺔ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺮﻗﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻗﺮ ﻗﻮﻓﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻓﻴﺤﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺮﺣﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﻏﺪﻭﺓ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺸﻲ ﺑﺠﻴﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﺈﺍﺫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺄﻓﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﻲ ﻭﺛﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ
ﻓﺒﺎﻳﻌﻮﺍ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻴﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﺫﻫﺒﺖ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﺜﻮﺭﻭﻥ ﻭﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﺧﻠﻮﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺗﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﺀ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺟﻴﺸﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺎﺯ
Al-Zuhri said: "The people of AshSham offer Bay'a (allegiance) to the Sufyani. He defeats the people of the East (probably the black banners), kicking them out of Palestine. ...and follows them and defeats them in several more locations, including Qirqisia. He will suffer from Qarha in his throat and after entering Kufa, he leaves it and dies once he reaches the outskirts of AsSham. The people of AshSham will offer Bay'a to the son of Al-Kulaiba whose name is Abdullah bin Yazid bin Al-Kulaiba. His eyes are inwardly set deep in his eye sockets and his face is deformed. Once the people of the East know about the death of Sufyani, they say the reign of people of AshSham is finished. So, they rise up. Once Ibn Kulaiba (the second Sufyani) learns about this rise up, he sends an army. They fight and the defeat will be for the people of the East. Ibn Kulaiba's army will enter Kufa and kill the fighters (of people of the East) and takes their children and women, and destroys Kufa. Then, he will send an army to Hijaz (Mecca & Medina)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
Khalid bin Maadan said " The
Sufyani will defeat those who joined forces against him on two occasions, then he will die." (Nuaim bin Hammad’s Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺎﺵ ﻋﻤﻦ ﺣﺪﺛﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺟﻌﻔﺮ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺿﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻬﻪ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺩ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻟﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﻼ ﻻ ﻳﺮﻯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻳﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻧﻬﺰﻡ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻭﺱ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺑﻜﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻣﺮﻳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺆﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻴﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻓﺎﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺠﺪ ﺃﺣﺪﺍ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺆﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻗﻢ ﻓﺎﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻴﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺴﺒﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ ﻟﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﺤﻦ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻧﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻟﻴﻠﻘﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺗﻠﻪ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﻳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﻬﺰﻡ ﻭﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻳﻮﻣﺌﺬ ﻭﺍﻝ ﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻟﻰ ﺃﻡ ﺣﻜﻴﻢ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺸﺎﻡ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻭﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺄﺗﻴﻜﻢ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺭﺃﻳﺘﻪ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺒﺮ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﺑﺸﻲﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺯﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺯﺭﻳﺮ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺎﺳﺮ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻛﻠﻬﻢ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻚ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻜﻠﺐ ﻭﻳﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺑﺪﻣﺸﻖ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻦ ﺣﺪﺛﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﺑﻦ ﺇﺳﺤﺎﻕ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺟﻼ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻦ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺔ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﺚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻐﺰﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻡ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻋﻈﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺰﻭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺄﺗﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺮﻩ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺑﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺳﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﻜﻬﻢ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻤﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻱ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻳﻜﺮﻩ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﻠﻐﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻭﻩ ﻗﺪ ﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺪﺍ ﻓﻴﺴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﻘﺎﻩ ﻓﻴﻬﺰﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﻘﺘﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻷﻫﻞ ﻧﺼﺮﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻼﺩﻱ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﻭﻭﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﺭﺟﻌﻮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻼﺩﻛﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻨﻴﺖ ﻋﻨﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻌﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻼﺩﻫﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﺤﻦ ﻣﻠﻜﻨﺎﻩ ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﺼﺮﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻗﺘﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻧﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻼﺩﻧﺎ ﺑﻼﺩﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻠﻤﻮﺍ ﺣﺘﻔﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺏ ﻣﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﻠﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺮ ﻭﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻞ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻠﻮ ﻳﺸﺄ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺼﻴﻬﻢ ﺃﺣﺼﺎﻫﻢ ﻟﻘﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻘﻲ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ
12) The emergence of Abqa' and As'hab
Each of these Muslim men will be seeking to rule the Muslims.
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻱ ﻗﺮﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺮﻗﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺬ ﻭﺭﺟﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺟﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻴﻐﻀﺐ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺶ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﻔﺖ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﻌﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻤﻜﺔ
Zi Qarnat said: "People will differ in the month of Safar and split (in their allegiance) among four individuals: (1) a man who has sought refuge in Mecca, (2) two men in AshSham, one of them is the Sufyani and the other one in a son of Al-Hakam, who is blueish and As'hab (reddish white in complexion), (3) and a man from the people of Egypt who is a tyrant. These are the four. So, a man from Kinda (could be the U.S. or Britain) becomes angry. He marshes towards those vying for kingship in AshSham. His army comes to Egypt, kills the tyrant (Abqa') and destroys Egypt severely. Then, he sends an expedition to Mecca (to attack the Mahdi)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺡ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﻡ ﻭﺧﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻣﺸﻖ ﻭﺳﻘﻂ
ﻃﺎﺋﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﺪﻣﺸﻖ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻼﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻈﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﻗﺒﻠﺖ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺠﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﻡ ﺑﻘﺮﻗﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺳﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺤﻮﻣﻬﻢ
Artat bin Al-Munzir said: "If the Turks (Russians) and Romans (Europeans) (in alliance) amass their armies and a village in Damascus experiences Khusf (land collapse), and a group of people fall off the western end of their mosque, then three banners will be raised in AshSham: Abqa', As'Hab (reddish, white man), and Sufyani. A man in Damascus will be besieged, then killed with those who are with him. Two men from Bani Sufyan will appear (probably As'Hab and Sufyani), the second one will be the victorious. Once the support armies of Abqa' approach, the Sufyani defeats them. He (Sufyani) will kill the Turks (Russians) and Romans (Europeans) in Qirqisia (an ancient city in Eastern Syria) until the foxes in the land satisfy their hunger from their flesh (of the Turks and Romans)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
13) Black Banners from the East
The following narrations state that an army from the East (most likely from Khorasan) carrying black banners will lay the foundation for the Mahdi's future dominion, six years before the Mahdi appears. The name "Khorasan" is said to be derived from Persian words that mean "land where the sun rises".
Khorasan (a region that includes Afghanistan, Taijikstan, Northwestern Pakistan, Northeastern Iran, etc.).
Thawban reported that the Prophet
ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said, "Three men will be killed at the place where your treasure is (most likely, this is the treasure prophesied to be uncovered by Euphrates River, but may alternatively be the oil/petrol in Arabia, or the treasure underneath the Ka'ba). Each of them will be the son of a Caliph , but none of them will get hold of the treasure. Then, the
Black Banners will come out of the East, and they will slaughter you, in a way that has never been seen before . If you see him (the Mahdi), give him your allegiance, even by
crawling over snow, because he is the Caliph, the Mahdi." (Ibn Maja, Musnad Ahmad, Al-Haakim's Sahiha, Al-Zahabi, Ibn Kathir's
Niyaha fi Al-Fitan wa Al-Malahim , Abu Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan, Muhammad Al-Barzanji's
Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a ) The statement in this Hadith: " they will slaughter you, in a way that has never been seen before " is hard to understand and accept so we raise doubt about its authenticity.
Abdullah bin Masood narrated that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said : "A group of people will come from the East with Black Flags and they will ask for some “Khair” (financial assistance, share in wealth, weapons, etc.), but they will not be given what they ask for. So, they will fight and win against those people (who didn’t give them what they asked). Now, they will be given them what they asked for, but they will not accept it until they hand it over to a person from my Ahl Bayt (family) who will fill it (the Earth) with justice just as they filled it (the Earth) with oppression. So, whoever of you will be alive at that time should come to them (the Mahdi & People from the East with black flags) even by crawling over snow". (Ibn Maja, Muhammad Al-Barzanji's Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
Ali bin AbuTalib narrated that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said:
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ( ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺮ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺙ ﺑﻦ ﺣﺮﺍﺙ , ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺭ , ﻳﻮﻃﻲﺀ ﺍﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺶ ﻟﺮﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻭﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﺮﻩ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺎﺑﺘﻪ
"A man called Al-Harith bin Harrath will come forth from Ma Wara an-Nahr (Transoxiana, meaning the region, between the Amu Darya and Syr Darya rivers, which includes Uzbekistan and Tajikistan, bordering Afghanistan ). His army will be led by a man called Mansur
who will make matters ready and enabled for Muhammad's family as Quraish enabled matters for the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ . Every believer must help him, or he (the Prophet) said: 'respond to him ( to his calls)'." (Sunan Abu Dawud, Sunan AnNisa-ee, and Al-Buhaiqi) Ibn Khaldoon has commented that one of the narrators of this Hadith, Haroon bin Al-Mughira is a descendant of Shia (or has some Shia background), so this would weaken the authenticity of the Hadith.
Abdullah bin Al-Harith bin Jiz Al-Zubaidi said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said : "People from the East will come to assist the Mahdi in laying the foundation for his dominion." (Ibn Maja, Tabarani)
Abu Hurairah says that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "(Armies carrying) black flags will come from Khorasan . No power will be able to stop them and they will finally reach ﺇﻳﻠﻴﺎﺀ Eelya (Jerusalem) where they will erect their flags" . (Tirmizi)
Amr Bin Marra Al-Jamli said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: " 'Surely, Black Flags will appear from the Khorasan until a group (of them) will tie their horse leashes to the Olive Trees between Beit-Lahia (in Gaza district, Palestine) and Harasta (near Damascus, Syria) .' We asked: 'Are there any Olive trees between these places?' He said, 'If there isn’t any, then, soon (Olive trees) will grow so that those people (of Khorasan) will come and tie their horses there'.” (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan p. 215 )
Buraida said that Messenger of Allah
ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "After me, there will be many expeditions (armies). You should be in (or with) the expeditions (armies) of (coming from) Khorasan. " ( Jalal-uddine AsSuyuti's Al-Urf Al-Wardi fi Akhbar Al-Mahdi , a part of Al-Hawi li Al-Fatawa )
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ( ﻙ ) ﻧﻌﻴﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﺩ ( 894 ) ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ :
ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ , ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﺍﺩﺀ , ﻗﻼﻧﺴﻬﻢ ﺳﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺛﻴﺎﺑﻬﻢ ﺑﻴﺾ , ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﻢ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ : ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ [ ﺑﻦ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ] , ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻢ , ﻳﻬﺰﻣﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺰﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺱ , ﻭ ﻳﻮﻃﺊ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺳﻠﻄﺎﻧﻪ , ﻭﻳﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ , ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻭﺳﺒﻌﻮﻥ ﺷﻬﺮﺍ
Muhammad bin Al-Hanafia, said: " A black banner (army battalion) of Bani Al-Abbas ( family of Prophet Mohammad's ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ uncle, Al-Abbas) will come out . Then, another black banner (army battalion) will come from Khorasan. Their turbans are black and their clothes are white. At their front end will be a man named Shuayb bin Salih , from Tamim (tribe) . They will defeat the supporters of the Sufyani (and proceed further) until he (Shuayb bin Salih) arrives to Jerusalem (where) he will lay the foundation for the Mahdi's (future) dominion. He will be supplied with three hundred (men) from AshSham (Syria). From the time, he comes out (from Khorasan) until he hands over the matter (rule) to the Mahdi, there will be seventy two months (six years) ." (Nuaim Ibn Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan)
Saeed (or Sayyid) bin Al-Musayyab reported: "Black Banners will come from the East from the descendants of Al-Abbas. They will remain for whatsoever Allah wishes. Then, small Black Banners from the East will come to fight a man from the descendants of Abu Sufyan . They will give their allegiance to the Mahdi."
(Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻋﺒﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺠﻌﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺃﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﺒﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻴﺦ ﺃﺩﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻫﻠﻴﺔ [ ﻭ ] ﻗﺪ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﺟﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﻗﻮﺍ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻮﺍ ﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﻓﺎﻃﻤﺔ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻮﺍ ﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻮﺍ ﻷﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ
Al-Walid bin Muslim narrated based on an old man: "If the black banners split into 3 groups: a group calling for the progeny of Fatima (to rule the Muslims), a group calling for the progeny of the Abbas, and a group calling for (the kingship to be) for themselves..." (Nuaim bin Hammad's book Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻯ ﺃﺭﻡ ﻭﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺴﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: "When the black banners differ among each other, a town/city of the towns/cities of Iram and the western side of its Mosque collapses. Then, in AshSham, three banners (armies) come out for each of the As'Hab (reddish white man), Abqa', and Sufyani. The Sufyani comes from AshSham and the Abqa' from Egypt. The Sufyani will defeat them." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺮ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺟﻌﻔﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻢ ﺑﻜﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻳﻪ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻳﻘﺎﺗﻞ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ
ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺰﻣﻬﻢ
Abi Ja'far said: "A young man from Bani Hashem (Prophet Mohammad's
ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ family clan) with a mark in the palm of his right hand comes out from Khorasan with black banners. Between his hands (meaning assisting him) will be Shuayb bin Salih. He fights the followers of the Sufyani and defeats them." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﺧﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺧﺮﺍﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺷﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﺷﻌﻴﺐ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﻘﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﺻﻄﺨﺮ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻣﻠﺤﻤﺔ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ
ﻭﺗﻬﺮﺏ ﺧﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﻭﻳﻄﻠﺒﻮﻧﻪ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: "If Sufyani's Cavalry marsh to Kufa, the people of Khorasan will be requested to come to aid. The people of Khorasan will come out seeking the Mahdi. So, the Hashimi with an army carrying black banners, at its front end is Shuayb bin Salih, will meet the followers of the Sufyani at Istakhar Gate and a great battle will occur between them. The black banners will be victorious. Sufyani's Cavalry will run away. At that time, people will wish for the Mahdi (to appear) and ask for him." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
Al Zuhari who said " The black flags will come from the East, led by mighty men, with long hair and beards, their last names are taken from the names of their home towns and their first names are from a Kunya (nick name, usually starts with 'Abu', which means 'father of'' )." (Nuaim bin Hammad’s Kitab Al-Fitan )
Ammar binYasir said: " When the Sufyani reaches Kufa and kills the supporters of the family of Muhammad ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ , the Mahdi will come and the bearer of his Banner will be Shuayb, the son of Salih." (Nuaim bin Hammad’s Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺭﺑﺎﺡ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﺮ ﻭﻳﺪﻋﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺷﻢ ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﻨﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻬﻠﻚ
Ibn Masud said: " A man from Mawali appears and calls for (the dominion to be for) Bani Hashem (Prophet Mohammad's ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ family clan). He is called Abdullah. He will rule for 4 years and then die." (Nuaim bin Hammad’s
Kitab Al-Fitan )
14) The emergence of A'raj coming from Al-Maghreb
The following Hadith prophesies the emergence of a man who is described as A'raj coming from Al-Maghreb. In our End Times book , we identify the person who will most likely be the first evil person to appear in the beginning of the first phase of the End Times. The numerical value of his first plus his last name is equal to the numerical value of the Arabic word ﺃﻋﺮﺝ A'raj .
The word A'raj means a limper, someone who cannot walk normally. However, this evil person does not have to be an A'raj physically. It is likely that the reason he is described in the Hadith as an A'raj is simply to allow us to know his real name, by calculating the numerical value of his name. Furthermore, Al-Maghreb in this Hadith is not likely to be intended to refer to Al-Maghreb region that includes Morocco, Algeria, and Tunis. In our book, we explain what is meant by ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ Al-Maghreb based on our numerical value of this word :
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺃﺑﻮ ﻳﻮﺳﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﻱ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺃﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻋﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺓ
Reported on a chain of transmission on the authority of Ka'b: " The sign of the coming-out of the Mahdi is (army) battalions coming from Al-Maghreb , led by man who is an A'raj from Kinda." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan page 205)
15) Khusf (Land Collapse) in a village/city called Harasta
"The Earth will swallow a village called Harasta near Damascus."
(Muhammad Al-Barzanji's book Isha'ah li Ashrat Al-Sa'a )
ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻋﺴﺎﻛﺮ ( 216\2 ) ﻋﻦ ﺧﺎﻟﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﻝ : ﻳﻬﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ , ﺛﻢ ﻳﻬﻠﻚ , ﻭﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻮﻃﺔ , ﺗﺴﻤﻰ : ﺣَﺮَﺳْﺘَﺎ
Khaled bin Ma'daan said: "Sufyani defeats the group twice, then perishes. The Mahdi will not come out until a Khusf (land collapse) occurs in a village in Ghawta called Harasta." (Ibn A'sakir)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﻯ ﺇﺭﻡ ﻭﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺴﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻬﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: "When the black banners differ among each other, a village from the villages of Iram and the western side of its Mosque collapses. Then, in AshSham, three banners (armies) come out for each of the As'Hab (reddish, white man), Abqa', and Sufyani. The Sufyani comes from AshSham and the Abqa' from Egypt. The Sufyani will defeat them." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻥ
ﻋﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺥﺳﻒ ﻗﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺭﻡ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﺳﺘﺎ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻢ ﺃﺑﻲ ﺃﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺠﺪ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻓﺒﻴﻨﺎﻫﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻨﻈﺮﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﺎﺟﻴﺒﻪ ﺇﺫ ﺭﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻌﺮ ﻏﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻘﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﺳﺘﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺛﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻠﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﺧﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﺼﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻴﻘﺎﺗﻞ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺮﺩﻫﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺍﻕ
16) Two thirds of the World Population could die before the Mahdi ( Note, the following Hadiths are weak ! )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺿﻤﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺷﻮﺫﺏ
ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺳﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
Ibn Sirene said: "The Mahdi does not appear until seven out of every nine (human beings) die." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻰ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺭ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺛﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﻻﻱ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺳﻤﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﺛﻠﺚ ﻭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺛﻠﺚ ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ
Ali bin Abi Taleb (r.a.) said: "The Mahdi does not appear until one third (of people) are killed, one third dies (probably due to natural disasters), and one third remains." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻭﻫﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﺑﻦ ﺟﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﺨﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻴﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ
K'ab said: " The Earth will be devastated 40 years before AshSham (Greater Syria)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺬﻟﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻜﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺮ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﺏ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺳﻤﻌﺖ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﻒ ﺃﻣﺔ ﺳﺘﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮ ﻭﺃﻭﻝ ﺷﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻢ ﻫﻼﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻫﻠﻜﺖ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺳﻠﻜﻪ
17) The Shia's Books mention an additional sign
The Construction of Two Bridges:
The Shia believe the first bridge is the bridge that connects Saudi Arabia to Bahrain which was completed in 1986. The second bridge they expect it to be the proposed bridge that will connect Saudi Arabia to Egypt. It is proposed to be a 50-kilometer bridge -- one foot at Ras Hamid in Northern Saudi Arabia, the other at Egypt’s tourism center Sharm el-Sheikh) . So far, Egypt has rejected the construction of such a bridge under pressure from Israel and the U.S. On the other hand, construction of a bridge connecting Qatar to Bahrain is expected to start this year, in 2010 and to be completed within 4-5 years.
18) Prophecy in the Bible
The following prophecy in Isaiah 19: 16-25 of the Bible seems to correspond very well with the signs preceding the advent of the Mahdi mentioned above:
(a) Verse 17 talks about Israel attacking Egypt. This could be either a reference to Israel's attack on Egypt in 1967 or an attack that will happen in the future.
(b) Verse 18 mentions that Egyptians will be speaking language of Canaan which indicates that they will speaking a new language that ancient Egyptian did not speak. Canaan is the region that includes Lebanon and Palestine, where people speak Arabic, and previously Aramaic used to be spoken there which is also a Semitic language, very similar to Arabic. So, we sense that this prophecy is talking about events at the end of time.
(c) Heliopolis mentioned in verse 18 is a suburb of today's Cairo .
(d) Verse 19 mentions a sign and a pillar which could be the sign and column of fire or light we discussed above.
(e) Verse 20 talks about God sending the Egyptians a saviour from oppression. This saviour could be the Mahdi.
(f) Verse 23 says that there will be a highway from Egypt to Assyria. Assyria includes Syria, Lebanon, Palestine, Jordan, Iraq, and Northern Saudi Arabia. This highway could be the proposed bridge Sharm el-Sheikh in Egypt to Ras Hamid in Northern Saudi Arabia which as we have indicated above is one of signs, mentioned in Shia books, for the advent of the Mahdi.
Isaiah 19: 16-25 :
16In that day shall Egypt be like unto women: and it shall be afraid and fear because of the shaking of the hand of the LORD of hosts, which he shaketh over it.
17And the land of Judah (meaning Israel) will bring terror to the Egyptians; everyone to whom Judah is mentioned will be terrified, because of what the LORD Almighty is planning against them.
18In that day shall five cities in the land of Egypt speak the language of Canaan, and swear to the LORD of hosts; one shall be called, the City of Destruction ( some manuscripts of the Bible mention Heliopolis or City of the Sun).
19In that day shall there be an altar to the LORD in the midst of the land of Egypt, and a pillar at the border thereof to the LORD.
20And it shall be for a sign and for a witness unto the LORD Almighty in the land of Egypt: for they shall cry unto the LORD because of the oppressors, and he shall send them a Saviour , and a great one , and he shall deliver them.
21And the LORD shall be known to Egypt, and the Egyptians shall know the LORD in that day, and shall do sacrifice and oblation; yea, they shall vow a vow unto the LORD, and perform it.
22And the LORD shall smite Egypt:
he shall smite and heal it : and they shall return even to the LORD, and he shall respond to their pleas and heal them.
23In that day shall there be a highway out of Egypt to Assyria , and the Assyrian shall come into Egypt, and the Egyptian into Assyria, and the Egyptians shall serve with the Assyrians.
24In that day shall Israel be the third with Egypt and with Assyria, even a blessing in the midst of the land:
25Whom the LORD of hosts shall bless, saying, Blessed be Egypt my people , and Assyria the work of my hands , and Israel mine inheritance.
Sequence of Signs preceding the Mahdi
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺃﺑﻮ ﺯﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺯﺭﻳﺮﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻳﺎﺳﺮ ﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺪﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﻣﺎﺕ
ﺧﻠﻴﻔﺘﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻓﻴﺨﻠﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﻭﻳﺨﺴﻒ ﺑﻐﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﺪ ﺩﻣﺸﻖ ﻭﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻧﻲ
Amar bin Yusr said: "The sign of the Mahdi is: The Turks (possibly Russians or Americans) sweep down against you. Your Caliph who seeks wealth dies and you elect a successor after him who is weak so he gets deposed after 2 years from the Bay'a. A Khusf (land collapse) occurs in the West end of Damascus mosque (refers to Al-Aqsa Mosque in Jerusalem). The emergence of three individuals (
probably: Abqa' , Ash-Hab, and Sufyani) in AshSham (Greater Syria). The attack of People of the West on Egypt. This is (the beginning of) the reign of the Sufyani." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻓﺄﺧﺒﺮﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﻦ ﺑﺨﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺧﻠﺘﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﺋﻞ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﺎﺏ ﺑﻦ ﺑﺨﺖ ﻭﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻛﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺀ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ
Mak-hul said that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: " In the sky, there is an Aya (sign) for two nights passed. In (the month of)
Shawwal , there will be Mahmaha ( murmuring). In (the month of) Zul-Qi'da , there will be a clash. In (the month of) Zul-Hijja , there will be fighting. In (the month of) Al-Muharram: What is prohibited !
Abdul-Wahhab bin Bakht said that he was informed that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "In
Ramadan, there will be an Aya (sign) in the sky like an illuminating column (pillar). In Shawwal , there will be Bala' (calamity). In Zul-Qida , there will be perishing. In Zul-Hijja , pilgrims will be robbed. In Al-Muharram, What is prohibited ! "
(Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺒﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺷﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻦ ﺍﺑﻲ ﺳﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻮﺷﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻬﻤﻬﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻓﻲ
ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﻳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻻ ﺇﻥ ﺻﻔﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻔﻪ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻓﺎﺳﻤﻌﻤﻮﺍ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺃﻃﻴﻌﻮﺍ
Shaher bin Hawshab was informed that the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said: "In (the month of)
Ramadan, there will be a sound. In
(the month of) Shawwal , there will be a Mahmaha (murmuring). In (the month of) Zul-Qi'da , there will be a fighting among tribes. In (the month of) Zul-Hijja , the pilgrim will be robbed (looted). In (the month of) Al-Muharram , a caller from Heaven calls: 'The choice of Allah is this person, so listen to him and obey him'." (Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻭﻫﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ
ﻗﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺐ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻲ ﻫﺮﻳﺮﺓ ﺭﺿﻯﺎﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ
ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺼﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺴﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮﻱ ﺭﺑﻴﻊ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺭﺟﺐ ﺛﻢ ﻧﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺒﺔ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺳﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﻐﻞ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻟﻒ
Abu Hurayrah (r.a) said that the Prophet ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ said:
"There will be an Aya (sign) in (the month of) Ramadan. Then, there will 'isabah (splitting into groups) in
Shawwal . Then, there will be fighting in (the month of) Zul-Qi'da. Then, the pilgrim will be robbed in (the month of) Zul-Hijja . Then, the prohibitions will be violated in (the month of) Al-Muharram . Then, there will be sound in (the month of) Safar, then the tribes will conflict with each other in the two months of Rabi ( first Rabi and second Rabi) . Then, the most amazing thing will happen between (the months of)
Jumada and Rajab. Then, a well-fed she-camel will be better than a fortress (castle) sheltering a thousand (people)." (Al-Haakim , Nuaim bin Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺄﺓ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺬﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﻴﻊﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﻫﻼﻙ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻑ ﻭﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﻭﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺟﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﺮﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻠﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺎﺩ ﺭﺃﺳﺎﻫﺎ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻬﺎﺏ ﻳﻨﻘﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻭﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻼﺀ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ
Ka'b said: "The perishing (end) of Bani Al-Abbas (the progeny of Al-Abbas) will be once a star appears in Jawf (region), and a Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) and Wahiya (catastrophe). All of this in the month of Ramadan. The redness will be between the 5th and 20th of Ramadan. The Hadda (powerful, hammering sound) is between the middle and the 20th (of Ramadan). The Wahiya (catastrophe) is between the 20th and 24th (of Ramadan). A star thrown (by Allah from Heaven)
illuminates like a moon and then turns like a snake until its ends meet.
Two tremors will be in the night of Fis'hain. The star thrown (by Allah from Heaven) is a Shahab (asteroid) that rushes from the sky with a powerful sound when it drops in the East and because of it, people will experience magnificent disasters." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺷﻴﺦ ﻋﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻋﻲ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻭﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺠﻢ ﻳﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻌﻘﻒ
ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﺑﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻗﺤﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻕ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﺮﺏ ﻭﺣﻤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺕ ﻓﺎﺷﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﻠﺔ
Ka'b said: "The end of the kingship of
Bani Al-Abbas (the progeny of Al-Abbas) is redness in the sky which occurs between the 10th to 15th of Ramadan. A Wahiya (catastrophe) between the 20th and 24th of Ramadan and a star coming from the East that illuminates like a moon in a full moon night, then it turns. Also Ka'b said: "Drought in the East, Wahiya (catastrophe) in the West, redness in the Jawf (Interior), death that spreads (perhaps due to contagious diseases) in Qibla (Mecca)." (Nuaim bin Hammad's
Kitab Al-Fitan )
Abdullah ibn Umar said: While we were sitting with the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ , he mentioned the Fitan (strifes, trials & tribulations) , mentioning many of them until he mentioned the Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) of Ahlaas. Someone asked him: ' O Messenger of Allah, what is the "Ahlaas" Fitna? He said ' It is fleeing and plunder. Then, will come Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) of AsSarra': its smoke is under the feet of a man (descendant) from my household (family) , who claims he is of me ( my follower), but he is not because my Awlyia (followers or loyalists) are those who fear God. Then, the people will choose a man (to be a leader) who will be like a hip-bone on a rib (meaning he will not be able to hold a firm leadership grip) . Then, the
Duhaima (Dark & Cunning that catches people off guard) Fitna
(strife, trial & tribulations ) that will not leave anyone without slapping him a slap (testing his faith); if people say it is finished, it stays longer; a man who is in the morning a Mu'min (Believer) by the the evening becomes a Kafir (Disbeliever), until people will be divided into two factions: a faction of Iman (faithfulness in belief) without hypocrisy and a faction of hypocrisy without Iman (faithfulness in belief). When this happens, expect the (Fitna of) Dajjal that day or the next day'." ( Sunan Abu Dawud, Al-Haakim, and Al-Zahabi)
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻟﻬﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ
ﻋﻦ ﺣﺬﻳﻔﺔ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺟﺎﻝ
Huzaifa said: " The Fitan (strifes) after the Messenger of Allah ﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻠﻢ until the Hour (of Resurrection) are four : the first is 5 (years or months), the second is 20 (years or months), the third is 20 (years or months), the fourth is the Dajjal (Anti-Christ)." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺒﻴﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
ﻭﺫﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ
ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻚ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﺭﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ
Ka'b said: "There will be around the Euphrates , near AshSham ( Syria) or a little beyond it, a great assembly (of armies). They will fight each other over wealth, and seven out of every nine will be killed. And that will be after the Al-Hadda
(demolition) and the Al-Wahiya (catastrophe) in the month of
Ramadan, and after the split resulting in three banners (battalions or armies), each (head of a battalion or army) will seek the kingship (or possession of the wealth or treasure) for himself, among them is a man whose name is 'Abdullah." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺭﻃﺎﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺘﺒﻴﻊ
ﻋﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﺟﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺪﺏ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻢ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺒﺮﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺴﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺘﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻪ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﻘﺘﺘﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﻘﺘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
Ka'b said: "After two tremors (or disasters) occur in the month of Ramadan, three individuals from the same Household (family) spring forth (vying for kingship). One of them is vying for it by force, another one asking for it by piety, calmness, and dignity, and the third vying for it by killing and his name is Abdullah. There will be near the Euphrates river a great assembly for battle, where they will fight for the money (wealth or treasures). Seven out of every nine will be killed." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitan )
ﺣﺪﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﺟﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺛﻨﻲ ﺟﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻴﻤﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ
ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻫﺮﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺠﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺠﻠﻲ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺣﺴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻫﺐ ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ
Abu Huraira said: "The fourth Fitna (strife) remains for 12 years , then it clears . Once it clears, the
Euphrates will recede revealing a mountain of gold. Seven out of every nine (people fighting for it) will be killed." (Nuaim ibn Hammad's Kitab Al-Fitana
